Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit EL16-1184 - SOLA SALON STUDIOS - PANEL, TRANSFORMER ETC
SOLA SALON STUDIOS 351 STRANDER BLVD EL16-1184 City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov ELECTRICAL PERMIT Parcel No: 2623049064 Address: 351 STRANDER BLVD Project Name: SOLA SALON STUDIOS Owner: 2015 Name: REGENCY CENTERS LP Address: PO BOX 790830 C/O PROPERTY TAX WA Cities Electrical Code: DEPT, SAN ANTONIO, AZ, 78279 Contact Person: 2015 Name: GEORGE G. LANCE Address: 6418 E TANQUE VERDE SUITE 102, WA State Energy Code: TUCSON, AZ, 85715 Contractor: 2015 Name: ACCURATE ELECTRIC & SVC INC Address: 1429 AVE D, SNOHOMISH, WA, 98290 License No: ACCURES885JL Lender: Name: Address: Permit Number: EL16-1184 Issue Date: 1/11/2017 Permit Expires On: 7/10/2017 Phone: (520) 546-6667 Phone: (425) 263-9477 Expiration Date: 4/13/2018 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: NEW ELECTRICAL PANEL (277/480V), NEW STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER, NEW ELECTRICAL PANELS (120/208V), DISCONNECTS FOR REPLACEMENT RTU'S, INTERIOR LIGHTING (TROFFER & RECESSED CANS), VARIOUS OUTLETS THROUGHOUTTHE IMPROVED SPACE Valuation of single family: $0.00 Fees Collected: $2,614.50 Valuation of mf/comm: $130,000.00 Type of Work: TENANT IMP Electrical Service Provided by: PUGEST SOUND ENERGY Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: 2015 National Electrical Code: 2014 International Residential Code Edition: 2015 WA Cities Electrical Code: 2014 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2015 WAC 296-46B: 2014 Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: 2015 WA State Energy Code: 2015 International Fuel Gas Code: 2015 Permit Center Authorized Signature: - Date: 1— 1 1�'' 7 I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws r gulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development and afire i ' n hed to this permit. Signature: Date: Print Name:–>7 l_71 L1—t �'D This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: 'ELECTRICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS' 2: A copy of the electrical work permit shall be posted or otherwise made readily accessible to the Electrical Inspector at each work site. 3: Approved plans shall be maintained at the construction site and shall be readily available to the Electrical Inspector. 4: All electrical work shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - NEC, and requirements for electrical installations, Chapter 296-46B WAC. 5: When any portion of the electrical installation is to be hidden from view by permanent placement of parts of the building, such equipment shall not be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Electrical Inspector. 6: The issuance of an electrical work permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of the provisions of the electrical code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction. Permits or related documentation that presumes to grant this authority are therefore not valid. 7: Any change in the scope of work described by the electrical work permit shall require additional work permits. Where approved plans have been issued, revisions to the plans and additional review may be required. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 2100 ELECTRICAL FINAL 7003 ROUGH -IN ELECTRICAL 7002 SERVICE 7001 UNDERGROUND/SLAB CITY OF TUKFH. Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 bM://www.Tukwila WA. gov Electrical Permit No.�-- Project No. rrte^, Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: (a - a use ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. "Please Print" SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 2623049064 Site Address: 351 Strander Blvd Suite Number: n/a Floor: Found Tenant Name: Sola Salon Studios New Tenant: ® .....Yes ❑ ..No PROPERTY OWNER Name: Regency Centers, Inc. Address: 5335 Southwest Meadows Rd. City: Lake Oswego State: OR Zip: 97035 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: George G. Lance Address: 6418 E. Tanque Verde #102 City: Tucson State: AZ Zip: 85715 Phone: (520) 546-6667 Fax: (520) 546-4777 Email: L2architect@aol.com ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Esco Electric Address: 1050 N Eliseo C. Felix Jr Way - 104 City: Avondale State: AZ Zip: 85323 Phone: (623) 466-5137 Fax: (623) 386-0960 Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.; Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 130,000 Scope of work (please provide detailed information): New electrical panel (277/480V), new step-down transformer, new electrical panels (120/208V), disconnects for replacement RTUs, interior lighting (troffer & recessed can: Various outlets throughout the improved space. >>> Tied to Permit D16-0263 Will service be altered? ❑ Yes Type of Use: Beauty & Hair Salon m No Adding more than 50 amps? ❑ Yes m No Tune of work: ❑ New ❑ Addition ❑ Service Change 0 Remodel 0 Tenant Improvement ❑ Low Voltage ❑ Generator Propaty Served by ❑ Fire Alarm ❑ Telecommunication ❑ Temporary Service m Puget Sound Energy ❑ Seattle City Light HAApplieationsWorns-Applications On L ne\2014 ApplicationsTlectrical Permit Application Revised 1-1-14.docx Revised: January 2014 bb Page 1 of 2 Z RESIDENTIAL NEW RESIDENTIAL SERVICE ❑ New single family dwellings ...................................$152.85 (including an attached garage) ❑ Garages, pools, spas and outbuildings ........................ $81.90 ea ❑ Low voltage systems (alarm, furnace thermostat) ................................ $59.85 ea RESIDENTIAL REMODEL AND SERVICE CHANGES ❑ Service change or alteration ...................................... $81.90 (no added/altered circuits) ❑ Service change with added/altered circuits ................. $81.90 number of added circuits ....................... $11.55 ea ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change ........... $54.60 (up to 5 circuits) ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change ........... $54.60 (6 or more circuits) ............................................... $7.65 ea ❑ Meter/mast repair ....................................................... $68.25 ❑ Low voltage systems ................................................. $59.85 (alarm, furnace thermostat) PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - MULTI -FAMILY AND COMMERCIAL Fees are based on the valuation of the electrical contract. MISCELLANEOUS FEES ❑ Temporary service (residential) ................................. $65.00 ❑ Temporary service (generator) ................................... $80.90 ❑ Manufactured/mobile home service ........................... $86.25 (excluding garage or outbuilding) ❑ Carnivals....................................................................$80.60 Number of concessions ......................... $10.80 ea Each ride and generator truck ............... $10.80 ea ***EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1, 2014 EACH PERK 1T WILL BE ASSESSED A 5% TECHNOLOGY FEE* * * Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not to exceed 90 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. 1 HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Date: 12/20/2016 1e: (520) 546-6667 Mailing Address: L2 Architects 6418 E Tanque Verde Rd Tucson AZ 85715 City Stale zip H:4lpplications\Fonns-Applications On Line\2014 ApplicationsTlectrical Permit Application Revised 1-1-14.docx Revised: January 2014 bit Page 2 of 2 DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID PermitTRAK $2,614.50 EL16-1184 Address: 3515TRANDER BLVD Apn: 2623049064 $2,614.50 ELECTRICAL $2,513.94 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 $2,011.15 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $502.79 TECHNOLOGY FEE $100.56 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R10191 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $100.56 $2,614.50 Date Paid: Thursday, December 29, 2016 Paid By: GALILEO CONSTRUCTION LLC Pay Method: CHECK 5944 Printed: Thursday, December 29, 2016 9:26 AM 1 of 1 SY57EM5 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 4 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION' I'/ 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project:0 Type of Inspection: Address: / S t Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: o a.m. Requester: T Phone No: vii Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. ct' / A ® A- / Iinspector: ` // fr)r-.4 re -11 ( Iuate: ® 3/o 6 h7 I REINSPECT04 FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD E� Retain a copy with permit ,L —11y INSP CTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project:�OL+ /J Type of Inspection: l Address: � „ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone No: 17Y G Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. Iinspector: �! /`il pYA[ pA Iuate: ®3 /z I h-7 F1 REINSPECTION FPE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, tee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Gall to schedule reinspection. ]INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit"NO..INSPECTION N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING D 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: c� Address: � Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: ® a.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. 1-1 Corrections required prior to approval. iu �Inspector: '`A (_ 1 1Date: 02 /07 Ill El REINSPECTION(FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PRP N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 1 1-7 Project: Type of Inspection� r Address:1 _ _ / Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone NoWWr��' FlApproved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. U paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 k i Project: ' i� Type of Inspection: to l Address: 3 r Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. Requester: Phone No: jI �? l Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. t s R r REINSPECTION PEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Sou hcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. wERMli G06RD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: EL16-1184 DATE: 12/29/16 PROJECT NAME: SOLA SALON STUDIOS SITE ADDRESS: 351 STRANDER BLVD X Original Plan Submittal Revision # Response to Correction Letter #, DEPARTMENTS: �$ Aw(- 7 Building Division Fire Prevention Public Works ❑ Structural PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Corrections Required ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued ❑ Planning Division ❑ ❑ Permit Coordinator it DATE: 01/03/17 Structural Review Required ❑ DATE: DUE DATE: Approved with Conditions ❑ Denied ❑ (ie: Zoning Issues) DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 01/31/17 12/18/2017 Accurate Electric & Svc Inc Washington State Department of Labor & Industries Accurate Electric & Svc Inc Owner or tradesperson Principals Billington, Krystal L, PRESIDENT Billington, Krystal, AGENT Doing business as Accurate Electric & Svc Inc WA UBI No. 603 197 701 License Horne Espahol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance 1429 Ave D Suite 356 SNOHOMISH, WA 98290 425-263-9477 SNOHOMISH County Business type Corporation Page I of 2 Search L&I A-'1., Index help My I.,I Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Electrical Contractor Active. ......................... Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. ACCURES885JL Effective — expiration 04/13/2012— 04/13/2018 Designated administrator BILLINGTON, STEVE License type Electrical Administrator Bond .............. Western Surety Co Bond account no. 62740917 Received by L&I 04/26/2016 Bond history Savings Nonsavings accounts during the previous 6 year period. License Violations No license violations during the previous 6 year period. I Workers' comp Active. Meets current requirements. License no. BILLIS'935K3 $4,000.00 Effective date 04/13/2016 Expiration date Until Canceled Do you know if the business has employees? If so, verify the business is up-to-date on workers' comp premiums. L&I Account ID Account is current. Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=603197701&LIC=ACCURES885JL&SAW= 1/11/2017 Accurate Electric & Svc Inc 236,358-00 Doing business as ACCURATE ELECTRIC 8r SERVICE IN Estimated workers reported Quarter 4 of Year 2016 "4 to 6 Workers" L&I account representative T3 / KAYLENE MONIER (360)902-6627 - Email: BRKB235@lni.wa.gov Workplace safety and health Check for any past safety and health violations found on jobsites this business was responsible for. Washington State Dept. of Labor & Industries. Use of this site is subject to the laws of the state of Washington. Page 2 of 2 Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=603197701&LIC=ACCURES885JL&SAW= 1/11/2017 E NOTE 1 \ ii9 011 A 33 +i/ X 33 033 '� � I O9 9 ®9 9 O 033 A C S 125 125 3 3 09 C A 33 STUDIO 127 _127 11 3 033 A O 3 ENTRY LL�� 154 33 0 O 1 STUDIO 28 ---L 8 T9(D 1 C 7 X® 7 o _o_ STUDI 29 1 -1 L i 124 Q 3 0 3 LSTUD30 B 1 O 1 3 O STUDIO 26 3 126 O 3 STB31 131 3 0 O7 O9 O 3 STU 1 10 20 1 bn B 3 033 033 09 Q33 o61+ 0.1 LS �(:��UDIO 3 121 B 112311 3 3 O O 3 3 0 3 B- UDIO 133 3 O7 0 5 STUDIO 18 O118 O 5 5 33 033 A 031 A O9 TUDIO 7 19 B N 1 11 R 117 21 21 0 O 21 21 3 3 11.1 O —STUDIO 35 3 135 J �tfs oS ENTRY 155 07� O 7 B 3 LST DIO 13 137 B 3C 7 0 A 7 3 7 9 7 0 0 0 X _S:L! 32 STUDIO 36 B 1 136 O o B 0 0 1 1 21 0 21 STU 9 I 1 21 21 O 5 T1 TUDI 13 5 C 31 31 CO O 031 A 1i 1-1 21 0 21 O 21 ISXNDIO 4 140 21 1 E4 LIGHTING PLAN 9 21 21 0 21 C UDIO _B_ 102 21 0 7 9 0 0 O STUDI 1 101 1 O O 5 5 ST 12 T ^STU 1011 B �11 5 5 Ll–s 9 31 X 31 0 O 090 31 Q31 031 A C 31 O 21 031 O A 21 STUDIO 101 0 (pi 31 21 09 A 1/4 $I= i '-0" O7 9� 31 O C_ C��2RIDOR 143 031 A 311 I o= O5 NOTE 2 5 OS O WOM NS 147 05 A — — — K P9 031 STIBULE A 145 O5 �5 f os O5 �� TE 2 0 5 O 5 r B L STU 107 5 g0 5 A CORRIDOR O -- 144 / 05 os, O C STU STUDIO 10 7 104 1 7 O O 5 1 0 STUDIO 2 O 104 1 1 O 0 1 1 IL GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES., A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD CONDI TIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELFWITHTHE WORKPRIORTO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVEFIRSTSALVAGERIGHTSONALL MATERIALSANO EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BEING REMOVED. F. TIE EXI T SIGNS, FROG EYES AND NIGHT L IGHTS INTO THE LIGHTING CIRCUITAHEAD OF SWITCHES. G. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE CIRCUIT POSITION. H. CIRCUI TS REFER TO PANEL "A ", UNLESS INDICA TED OTHERWISE. LIGHTING NOTES. - 1. OVERRIDE SWITCH, SEEDETAIL 1/E3.1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. CEILINGMOUNTED OCCUPANCYSENSOR . 3. PROVIDEA 1000 WATT L UTRON DIVA DIMMER, COLOR TO MA TCHLIGHT SWITCHESAND RECEPTACLES. Permit wo. D-1 C0 Pian review approv l is sub!ect to errors and Omissions. Approval of consiruciien d04--UIfl011tS does not rauIhoriza the violation of any a opted code or ordina Seco ;yt of a rovo �j PP �yan c n - ns a c,rz By: Date: City of TukvWla BUILDING DIVISION No changes shall FO to the scope of VJor€t without prior approval of TBuilding Division. MOTE: RICvi740113 c ill require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. �SE�'��, PLRMIT REQUIRED FOR: C14 chanied 0 Qectrioai PrasPlplM Ing City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED .FOR COMPLIANCE WITH IP PA 70 - NEC JAN 112017 City of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R E C E I VFl. 0 CITY OF If WWALA 2 9 2046 PERMIT CENTER i COPYRIGHT OO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 D to0 GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES., A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD CONDI TIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELFWITHTHE WORKPRIORTO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVEFIRSTSALVAGERIGHTSONALL MATERIALSANO EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BEING REMOVED. F. TIE EXI T SIGNS, FROG EYES AND NIGHT L IGHTS INTO THE LIGHTING CIRCUITAHEAD OF SWITCHES. G. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE CIRCUIT POSITION. H. CIRCUI TS REFER TO PANEL "A ", UNLESS INDICA TED OTHERWISE. LIGHTING NOTES. - 1. OVERRIDE SWITCH, SEEDETAIL 1/E3.1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. CEILINGMOUNTED OCCUPANCYSENSOR . 3. PROVIDEA 1000 WATT L UTRON DIVA DIMMER, COLOR TO MA TCHLIGHT SWITCHESAND RECEPTACLES. Permit wo. D-1 C0 Pian review approv l is sub!ect to errors and Omissions. Approval of consiruciien d04--UIfl011tS does not rauIhoriza the violation of any a opted code or ordina Seco ;yt of a rovo �j PP �yan c n - ns a c,rz By: Date: City of TukvWla BUILDING DIVISION No changes shall FO to the scope of VJor€t without prior approval of TBuilding Division. MOTE: RICvi740113 c ill require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. �SE�'��, PLRMIT REQUIRED FOR: C14 chanied 0 Qectrioai PrasPlplM Ing City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED .FOR COMPLIANCE WITH IP PA 70 - NEC JAN 112017 City of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R E C E I VFl. 0 CITY OF If WWALA 2 9 2046 PERMIT CENTER i COPYRIGHT OO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 z W LU 0 crCLz z W D to0 ,I o 00 �} j OCD o^ 00 000 1H v 0 c c a� a� c.� z W LU 0 crCLz z W •- NEL ® -. • wl FA NEL A l • • 10G, J14"C - 1 0 1 \ FA NEL H 1 78 ABOVE F •w. •-PANEL - ��- 1 1 .. ®EQUIP P1 A FORM ... f 9I WALL NOTE J & 11 BE 6I , . 81111 w 82 N5TE 2 [BRE 10 -�• . /' 82 P-1 •' IiiM STUDIO 22 STUDIO 20 112-2169 61 120 -50" 82 +50" +50" 82 ®46 77 +90 73 73 OC 6� 79 J 1 STUDIO 24 77 73 81 NOTE 4 81+90"81 NO 9 +45" 71 STUDIO 23 +45" 81 of +45" 62 +90" 52 A -h 62 66 64 NOTE 4 �ss 90" 66 NOTE 4 68 70 90" 70 545" 70 124 WP,GF 77 J NOTE 4 123 A-16 AHU-1 NOTE 8 NOTE STUDIO 25 D 77 r7j 7.365 125 !: A 78 I 58 STUDIO 127 AO35 127 J DAMPER 11NOTE WP,GFCI A-16 EF -1 NOTE 8 l :+45" 58 58 ENTRY 154 60J NOTE 4 626 STUDIO 28 128 62 ®46 I -K 1174 111 NOTE 4 54 STUDIO 26 +90" 54 126 5¢ 54 8; STUDIO 31 OTE 81- 131 i 131 +45"rrn +9 78 _ am== 57 45 5 57 STUDIO 19 45 STUDIO 17 117 J 55 119 rNOTE NOTE 4 _57 I->4 5J �42 40 NOTE 4 ,42 NOTE + 30 26 30 STUDIO 13 go" 113 3 26 �78 CORRIDOR 148 +45" 45 CORRIDOR 45 149 42 e 34 STUDIO 114 +90" 11434 16 +45" 34 91 18. 1 NOTE 4 34 18 J 32 STUDIO 10 Lim 111011 38 +45" 38 18 STUDIO 15 +g0" 38 115 +45" +90" 18 tm 3B STUDIO 16 116 42 38 +45"+4 n +90" +45"J8 38 NOTE 4 42 42 J 36 106 J 4 37 37� 108 NOTE 4 108 +90" 45" X04 108 ;7 1+45" STUDIO 108 140 1+90" 108 r.Trjr� 22 NOTE 9 WP,GFCI A-16 STUDIO 11 EF -2 NOTE 8 111 84 WOMENS AC 147 22 - r NOTE 9 �44 G A -16 I VESTIBULE A-16 HU -4 145 NOTE 8 DNOTE 5 78 AO35 J DAMPER 5-11all, , +45"1 41 41 9 +90" 411 41� STUDIO 7 4 107 1 MENS 146 8� AC 0 (D+90" +45 15 15 15 +45 15 I'- ,x.11 —� 26 STUDIO 3 c0 NOTE NOTE STUDIO 12 2 J 2k 45,v 22 11290" n 23 26 22 34 STUDIO 114 +90" 11434 16 +45" 34 91 18. 1 NOTE 4 34 18 J 32 STUDIO 10 Lim 111011 38 +45" 38 18 STUDIO 15 +g0" 38 115 +45" +90" 18 tm 3B STUDIO 16 116 42 38 +45"+4 n +90" +45"J8 38 NOTE 4 42 42 J 36 106 J 4 37 37� 108 NOTE 4 108 +90" 45" X04 108 ;7 1+45" STUDIO 108 140 1+90" 108 r.Trjr� 22 NOTE 9 WP,GFCI A-16 STUDIO 11 EF -2 NOTE 8 111 84 WOMENS AC 147 22 - r NOTE 9 �44 G A -16 I VESTIBULE A-16 HU -4 145 NOTE 8 DNOTE 5 78 AO35 J DAMPER 5-11all, , +45"1 41 41 9 +90" 411 41� STUDIO 7 4 107 1 MENS 146 8� AC 0 (D+90" +45 15 15 15 +45 15 I'- ,x.11 —� 9 STUDIO 3 c0 >3 +90"1 NOTE 105 23 n 23 00 11 +90" 21 11 11 NOTE 4 J > c J a� NOTE 4 23 15 NOTE 1 E10 _ U NOTE 10 GENERAL LIGHT/NG NOTES. - A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROV/DED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD COND/TIONSAT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELF WITH THE WORKPR/OR TO BIDDINGAND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONS/BLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR/NSTALLAT/ON AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. PULL EL CTR/CAL BACK TO SRL ICE BOX. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRSTSAL VA GE RIGHTS ONALL MATER/ALSAND EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITSAS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BE/NG REMOVED. F. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE TELEPHONE COMPANY TO VERIFY THE NUMBER OFL/NES COM/NG INTO THE BUILDING. PHONE LINESARE REQUIRED TO EACH STUDIO FROM THE CENTRAL PHONE BLOCK. CLEARL YMARK STUDIO ROOM NUMBERS ON THE PHONE BLOCKFOR EASE OF CONNECT/ON. G. COORDINATEEXACTLOCATIONOFALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES WITH ARCH/TEC TURA L SHEETA 1.6. H. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE C/RCU/T NUMBERAND REFERS TO PANEL "B , UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. I. CIRCUIT STUDIO RECEPTACLES DOWNSTREAM OF THE GFCI RECEPTACLE ADJACENT TO THE DOOR. J. REFER TOARCHITECTURAL PLANS FORALL D/MENS/ONSANDDEV/CE LOCA TIONS. POWER AND SYSTEMS NOTES. - 1. PROVIDE FINAL CONNECT/ON TO SIGNAGE. COORDINATELOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. PROVIDELOCAL DISCONNECT SWITCH MOUNTED /NAN INCONSPICUOUS L OCA TION. EACHSIGN C/RCUI T SHALL HA VE SEPARA TE NEUTRAL AND SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTORS. 2. PROV/DEA PLYWOOD TELEPHONEBACKBOARD. COORDINATEEXACT SIZEAND LOCA TION W/TH THE OWNER AND THEARCH/TECT. BACKBOARD SHALL BEPAINTED WITH TWO COATS OFGREYF/RE RETARDANT PA INT PRO VIDE A GROUND BAR MOUNTED ON TELEPHONE BACKBOARD W/THA #6 GROUND WIRE TO THE POWER SYSTEMS GROUND/NG ELECTRODE SYSTEM. ALL TELEPHONE, DATA AND TELEVISIONCABLES SHALL BE ROUTED TO THIS LOCA TION. 3. VERIFYEXACT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EQUIPMENT ROOM EQUIPMENT WITH THE OWNERANo THE ARCHITEC T PRIOR TO ROUGH /N. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROV/DEA 36"FLEXIBLE WHIP CONDUITAT f24" A. F. F FOR THREE DUPLEX RECEPTACLES MOUNTED IN COUNTER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM FINAL INS TALLATION AND CONNECT/ON TO THREE DUPLEXRECEPTA CLESAFTER FIXTURE IS INSTALLED. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH THE LIGHT SWITCH/CONTACTOR. 5. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AND SHUT -DOWN RELAY SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR INS TALLA TION BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COORD/NA TECOMPATIBIL/TY WITH THE FIREALARM SYSTEM. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDEA REMOTE TEST STA TION WHERE REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AH✓. COORD/NA TE REMOTE TEST STA TION MOUNTING LOCATION WITH OWNER A ND FIRE MA RSHA L L. FINAL WIRING SHALL BE B Y THE EL EC TRICA L CONTRACTOR. 6. NOT USED. 7. NOT USED 8. DISCONNECT SWITCH IS PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INTEGRAL WITH THEEQU/PMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PULL C/RCUITFROM DISCONNECTSW/TCHASINDICA TED. 9. WEATHERPROOF GFCI SERVICE RECEPTACLE IS PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INTEGRAL WITH THE EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PULL CIRCU/TASINDICATED. 10. WIRE THIS SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE THROUGH THE CONTACTOR/L/GHT SWITCH. 11. PROV/DE(3)DUPLEXRECEPTACLESANDM0UNT, REFER TOARCHITECTURAL SHEETA 1.6 FOR ROUGH IN HEIGHTS. 12. PERFERRED LOCA TION OF FIREALARM CONTROL PANEL. FIRE ALARM DES/GN INA DEFFERED SURMITTAI. i COPYRIGHTO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 Lfw, VN c0 ' o n 00) .0 00 C-) 00 •t7 SO � c WJ a� •c _ U TORK NSI SS403, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS. F LOCATED BY FRONT DOOR. �TS TC -1 TORK NSI DG200A, OR APPROVED EQUAL DIGITAL TIMECL OCK WITH RESERVE POWER TORK #55A200, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS L OCA TED BY BACK DOOR. — T-� — L— — -I A-1 O� STI r LTG L A-3�—� �o I LLTG —_J I I _ A-5— ��- LTG ] J -J A- 7 L LTG __1 A-11 I I I FLTG7 °� r` L — J A-17 % EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE L TG J A-21 — o- KEY DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTICS FEEDER PANEL LOCAL LOCAL SCHEDULE i L LTG I�--�---o- TC1 30A A- 29 �-o—I HP KVA FLA VOLTAGE PH CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* SWITCH FUSE NOTES EF -1 EXHAUST 3/4 1.3 1.6 460 3 3#12+#12G H1 30A,3P I �IIV 2 I FAN FLUORESCENT SPARE---I--o-I HALON CONTROL PANEL REVISION NUMBER IN 3/4"C. DISC. SW. ®FUSE SURFACE OR PENDANT( EF -2 EXHAUST 3/4 1.3 1.6 460 3 HALO H1 SW SECTION OR ELEVATION BUBBLE 2 120 TRANSFORMER X XX REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT WITH w + SECTION OR ELEVATION N#13/4 C2G NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER D30A, RECESSEDWFLORESCENT K AHU-1 AIR HANDLING -- 11.3 14.1 460 3 3#12+#12G H1 30A,3P NUMBER 1,3,4 # UNIT O RECESSED LUMINAIRE DOWNLIGHT ��<� CHIME w REFERENCE BUBBLE IN 3/4"C. DISC. SW. ❑ SURACEMOUFNTED OLUMINAIRE� l� N FD --Dl AHU-2 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 3#10+#10G H1 30A,3P NUMBER 1,3,4 UNIT WALL BRACKET LUMINAIRE EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER EQUIPMENT KEY IN 3/4"C. -3 �- DISC. SW. ® RECESSED DIRECTIONAL Q AHU-3 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 3#10+#10G IN 3/4"C. H1 30A,3P DISC. SW. NAVILITE 1,3,4 l_SURFACE UNIT DIRECTIONAL ® FS FLOW SWITCH Fj]JUNCTION BOX _ LUMINAIRE AHU-4 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 � 3#10+#10G H1 30A, 3P X 1,3,4 _ UNIT Iv -i# OF LUMINAIRES SHOWN H<HORN/ STROBE IN 3/4'C. }- DISC. SW. EXIT LUMINAIRE, ARROWSMANUAL ® INDICATE DIRECTION, SHADING F7m GENERAL NOTES: OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. VERIFY THE ABOVE SCHEDULED INFORMATION WITH DIVISION 15 CONTRACTOR AND SUBMITTALS. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY BY OTHERS DEVIATIONS FROM THE ABOVE SCHEDULED INFORMATION PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF POINTS OF CONNECTION 26W -TRIPLE TUBE WITH DIVISION 15 PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. - - - CONTROL CIRCUIT SCHEDULE NOTES (NOTES LISTED BELOW MAY OR MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS SET OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS): SMOKE DETECTOR 1. NEMA 3R DISCONNECT SWITCH. ®w LOCAL MOTOR STARTER PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. 2. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH CONTACTOR FOR CONTROL. SS O SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTOR 3. CONNECT SMOKE DETECTOR PER PLAN NOTES. (w INDICATES TYPE) NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. 4. PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH SIZE PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. SPEAKER WITH 5. THIS RTU IS EXISTING AND IS BEING RE -FED FROM THE NEW PANEL LOCATION. F7, LOCAL COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER aw X 6. CIRCUIT THIS FAN THROUGH THE LIGHT SWITCH SERVING THIS ROOM. P VISUAL INDICATOR TORK NSI SS403, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS. F LOCATED BY FRONT DOOR. �TS TC -1 TORK NSI DG200A, OR APPROVED EQUAL DIGITAL TIMECL OCK WITH RESERVE POWER TORK #55A200, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS L OCA TED BY BACK DOOR. — T-� — L— — -I A-1 O� STI r LTG L A-3�—� �o I LLTG —_J I I _ A-5— ��- LTG ] J -J A- 7 L LTG __1 A-11 I I I FLTG7 °� r` L — J A-17 % -�—� L TG J A-21 — o- o I LTG LOADS CONTROLLED REMARKS ELECTROMECHANICAL A-31 >--f o I 24-HOUR LTG 1 A-33--moo-� i L LTG I�--�---o- TC1 30A A- 29 �-o—I F H 1-14,16 ,18 >— I M P-1 F X CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* H1-20,22,24 XI M EF -1 1 .17SPST A-20 TC1 A-73 I SPARE I MIF M EF -2 N B-44� VS FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR z B-46> I �IIV EQUIPMENT (• INDICATES TYPE) I J FLUORESCENT SPARE---I--o-I HALON CONTROL PANEL AUTOMATIC TIMER SCHEDULE MARK TYPE VOLTAGE BATTERY BACKUP LOADS CONTROLLED REMARKS ELECTROMECHANICAL DIGITAL 24-HOUR 7 -DAY ASTRONOMIC SWITCH CHANNELS CONTACTS TC1 30A 12 X 120V 2 SPDT 120 X CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* TC2 XI 1 1 .17SPST A-20 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL 120 X VARIES MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL*1 * SEE DETAIL 1/E3.1 CONTACTOR SCHEDULE MARK TYPE CONTACT RATING CONTACT QTY. COIL VOLTAGE CIRCUITS CONTROLLED CONTACTOR CONTROLLED BY: REMARKS ELEC. MECH. N.O. N. C. C-1 X MISCELLANEOUS 30A 12 DESCRIPTION 120V A -1,3,5,7,9,11,15,17,19,29,B-27,29,44,46 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL C-2 X 30A 2 FRCP 120V A-20 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL Fc -__2 -1 A-20--1----0-� EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SPARE iT l L --- B-27::-- ' I SHOW RECEPTACLES B-29 % o-� I-o�- SHOW RECEPTACLES i SQUARE D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L, OR EQUAL, ELECTRICALLY HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH NORMA LL Y OPEN CONTACTS MOUNTED IN NEMA I ENCLOSURE LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL 1 SCALE: NTS E.1 SQUARE 'D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L, OR EQUAL, ELECTRICALL Y HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH NORMAL Y OPEN CONTACTS MOUNTED IN NEMA I ENCLOSURE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL LEGEND LAMP SPECIFICATION MOUNTING NOT ALL ITEMS LISTED BELOW ARE USED ON THIS SET OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (SEE GENERAL NOTE A) ONE -LINE LIGHTING FIRE ALARM N MISCELLANEOUS POWER DISTRIBUTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION WEATHERHEAD SERVICE E3 2x2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FRCP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (D THERMOSTAT -LINE VOLTAGE ® w ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION = CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 RECESSED FLUORESCENT EARA FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ® FLAG NOTE EQUIPMENT (• INDICATES TYPE) —�— DISCONNECT SWITCHRECESSED FLUORESCENT HCP HALON CONTROL PANEL REVISION NUMBER MDC MAIN DISTRIBUTION -= ®FUSE SURFACE OR PENDANT( _�� FUSED DISCONNECT 600 VOLTS AND UNDER F -O -P MOUNTED FLUORESCENT HALO REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT 1 SECTION OR ELEVATION BUBBLE MCC MOTORCONTROL CENTER 120 TRANSFORMER X XX REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT WITH w + SECTION OR ELEVATION SDC SECONDARY NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER �( TRANSFORMER KEY I DICATES CONNECTION) RECESSEDWFLORESCENT K KEY TEST/RESET SWITCH 48W LED LETTER # REFERENCE DRAWING DISTRIBUTION CENTER (' X g NUMBER BR BUS RISER # D DELTA CONNECTION Y WYE CONNECTION O RECESSED LUMINAIRE DOWNLIGHT ��<� CHIME w REFERENCE BUBBLE PANELBOARD SHIELDED TRANSFORMER ❑ SURACEMOUFNTED OLUMINAIRE� l� N FD --Dl KE * REFERENCE LETTER # CE DRAWING PB PULL BOX - CURRENT TRANSFORMER Q FD—H] DETECTOR DOOR HOLDER 120 NUMBER T❑ TRANSFORMER X WALL BRACKET LUMINAIRE EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER EQUIPMENT KEY METER -3 �- POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ® RECESSED DIRECTIONAL Q FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER OO * INDICATES EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (2) JUNCTION BOX ® FEEDER KEY LUMINAIRE INTERFACE K NAVILITE N1WH l_SURFACE GROUND DIRECTIONAL ® FS FLOW SWITCH Fj]JUNCTION BOX _ LUMINAIRE X LITHONIA LE S 1 R 120/277 EL N FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPLIED GROUND BUS LIGHT TRACK EEI HORN X ® C LOCAL CONTACTOR _ Iv -i# OF LUMINAIRES SHOWN H<HORN/ STROBE ❑, LOCAL DISCONNECT WITH }- DRAWOUT DEVICE EXIT LUMINAIRE, ARROWSMANUAL ® INDICATE DIRECTION, SHADING F7m PULL STATION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION -----GROUND CONDUCTOR INDICATES LIGHTED FACES BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE []lLOCAL DISCONNECT - - - CONTROL CIRCUIT X S SMOKE DETECTOR X ®w LOCAL MOTOR STARTER PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. TRANSFER SWITCH (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL) ® SS O SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTOR NOTE C: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE, TRIM RINGS, ETC. FOR THE TYPE OF CEILING SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. (w INDICATES TYPE) NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. PANELBOARD LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO GENERATOR OR BATTERY PACKO SPEAKER WITH F7, LOCAL COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER aw X w INDICATES PANEL TYPE ® P VISUAL INDICATOR w(* INDICATES TYPE) FLOOR NUM E)R) IINDICATES PANEL LETTER)) Q OSFT THERMAL DETECTOR, FVNR FULL VOLTAGE L 208Y/120V, 240/120V 7 SOV E BATTERY PACK W/ LUMINAIRES ®RR FIXED TEMPERATURE OF RISE CTOR, NON -REVERSING �R E48OV l� LS LIFE SAFESTS REMOTE LUMINAIRE RATE RREEVVEERS NGAGE RV REDUCED VOLTAGE C CRITICAL AE AUTO -EQUIPMENT POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE EI -0 NUMBER OF HEADS AS SHOWN TAMPER SWITCH VISUAL INDICATOR 2S TWO SPEED C COMPUTER K KITCHEN A UPPERCASE LETTER INDICATES M MECHANICAL LUMINAIRE KEY MOTOR o LOWERCASE LETTER INDICATES CONTROLLING SWITCH VSD VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE TVSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION ®M METER SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT KEY O GENERATOR ® PROTECTIVE RELAY --- POWER OUTLETS — COMMUNICATIONS SWITCHING — RACEWAYS (# INDICATES ANSI NUMBER) TC 11MECLOCK SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION PES PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH B- SINGLE RECEPTACLE*TELEPHONE ® TERMINAL CABINET OR BACKBOARD S SWITCH (w INDICATES TYPE) HOME RUN TO PANEL, -'' CIRCUITS AS INDICATED FG -F-11 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER ® SINGLE RECEPTACLE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET SINGLE POLE SWITCH RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY ENCLOSURE A SINGLE RECEPTACLE, �W TELEPHONE OUTLET, FOR 2 DOUBLE -POLE 3 THREE WAY RUN II N NI10 N.C. CONTACTS CEILING MOUNTED WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE 4 FOUR WAY RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY N.O. NORMALLY OPEN DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® TELEPHONE OUTLET, CC CONTACTOR CONTROL D DIMMER ------RUN, UNDERGROUND OR UNDERFLOOR N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED FLOOR MOUNTED K KEY OPERATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ® FLOOR MOUNTED > DATA OUTLET LV LOW VOLTAGEGROUND CONDUCTOR ® DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ® DATA OUTLET, FLOOR MOUNTED M MANUAL MOTOR STARTER RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY DOWN CEILING MOUNTED ® COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND MTO MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DATA OUTLET THERMAL OVERLOADS UP DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE,® ® COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR WALL MOUNTED ® SURFACE RECEPTACLE STRIP FLOOR MOUNTED DATA OUTLET, FLOOR MOUNTED $ DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, -B TELEVISION OUTLET P LIGHT-LOAD ON PO PILOT LIGHT -LOAD OFF �n SURFACE RACEWAY, DEVICES AS INDICATED CEILING MOUNTED © CLOCK OUTLET T TIME AAS NOTTED PURPOSE OUTLET DICTATION OUTLET V VARIABLE SPEED a LOWER CASE LETTER BUSHED CONDUIT INDICATES EQUIPMENT �� MODULAR CONNECTOR AND SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET © CHIME CONTROLLED FLEXIBLE CABLE AS NOTED, FLOOR MOUNTED © BUZZER/BELL SS DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING �+—SEAL OFF FITTING DUPLEX SPLIT WIREDEPTACLE, ❑' PUSH BUTTON TC TIMECLOCK = CAPPED CONDUIT e= DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT TELE/POWER POLE, DEVICCES AS INDICATED OS CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR INTERRUPTING DEVICE POKE -THROUGH, FP—E-SFI _EL PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE, DEVICES AS INDICATED PC PHOTO ELECTRIC LIGHT CONTROL WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING DEVICE ®A ABANDONED POKE -THROUGH QA SWITCHBANK DESIGNATION TELE/POWER POLE, DEVICES AS INDICATED ® C LOCAL CONTACTOR ABBREVIATIONS A AMPERE COMM COMMUNICATION GEN GENERATOR NIC NOT IN CONTRACT SPKR SPEAKER AC ALTERNATING CURRENT OR COUNTER/BACK CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT (NL) NEW LOCATION SS STAINLESS STEEL AF ABOVE SPLASH AMPERE FRAME CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER CU COPPER HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HPS HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM N6 NORMALLY OPEN NTS NOT TO SCALE STD STANDARD SV SOLENOID VALVE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR DET DETAIL HTR HEATER OC ON CENTER SW SWITCH AFG ABOVE FINSHED GRADE DIA DIAMETER HV HIGH VOLTAGE P POLE SWBD SWITCHBOARD AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY DISC DISCONNECT IG ISOLATED GROUND PB PUSH BUTTON SYM SYMMETRICAL AL ALUMINUM DIST DSTRIBUTION INC INCANDESCENT PES PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH TELE TELEPHONE ALM ALARM DN DOWN ISC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT PF POWER FACTOR TEMP TEMPERATURE APPROX APPROXIMATE DWG DRAWING JB JUNCTION BOX PH OR 0 PHASE T'STAT THERMOSTAT ARCH AT ARCHITECTURAL AMPERE TRIP (E) EXISTING LTG LIGHTING PNL PANEL TR TAMPER RESISTANT ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH EEOC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELEC ELECTRICAL LV LOW VOLTAGE MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRI PRIMARY PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE TYP TYPICAL TVSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE AUTO AUX AUTOMATIC AUXILIARY EM EMERGENCY EMT MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (R) REMOVE SUPPRESSION BJ BONDING JUMPER ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EQUIP EQUIPMENT MECH MECHANICAL MERC MERCURY VAPOR RCPt RECEPTACLE REV REVISION UG UNDERGROUND UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE BLDG BUILDING FC FOOTCANDLE MH METAL HALIDE (RL) REMOVE & RELOCATE POWER SUPPLY C CONDUIT FLEX FLEXIBLE MLO MAIN LUG ONLY RM ROOM V VOLT CB CIRCUIT BREAKER FLR FLOOR MV MEDIUM VOLTAGE RMC RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT VA VOLT-AMPERE CCT CIRCUIT FLUOR FLUORESCENT N NEUTRAL SCHED SCHEDULE W WIRE OR WATT CL CLG CENTER LINE CEILING G GROUND GEC GROUNDING ((N) NEW SEC SECONDARY WP WEATHERPROOF ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR Nt� NORMALLY CLOSED SFE SAFETY ENCLOSURE XFMR TRANSFORMER CMS COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER SPEC SPECIFICATION LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE LAMP SPECIFICATION MOUNTING (SEE GENERAL NOTE A) N w JQ Z v L W ¢ w m QUAN DESCRIPTION TYPE MARK MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER VOLTSED Of 0 REMARKS A HALO HTRIM:OUSI 999 H991CT 1 50W 4000K LED LED 120 X X NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER B METALUX 24SR-LD2-48-C-UNV-L835-CD1-U 2 48W LED FL 120 X X RUN 3 WIRES FROM FIXTURE TO OCC SWITCH C BY OWNER 1 25WT-3SPIRAL CFL 120 X X MOUNT AT +66" AFF, COORDINATE WITH G.C. E SURE-LITES AEL2 - SUPPLIED IND 120 X X X EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER F BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE CFL 120 X PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. 2700 K NAVILITE N1WH - SUPPLIED IND 120 X X X LITHONIA LE S 1 R 120/277 EL N - SUPPLIED FL 120 X X X TO BE APPROVED BY OWNER PRIOR TO PURCHASE P BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE CFL 120 X X PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: NOTE A: FL=FLUORESCENT, CFL=COMPACT FLUORESCENT, IND=INCANDESCENT, MH=METAL HALIDE, HPS=HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM, LPS=LOW PRESSURE SODIUM, MV=MERCURY VAPOR, LED=LIGHT EMITTING DIODE NOTE B: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LAMPS. ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE BY THE SAME LAMP MANUFACTURER IN ORDER TO MATCH COLOR PHOSPHORS. ALL FOUR FOOT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE OF THE LOW MERCURY CONTENT TYPE. NOTE C: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE, TRIM RINGS, ETC. FOR THE TYPE OF CEILING SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. NOTE D: FOR EXIT LIGHTS, COORDINATE MOUNTING CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT, DIRECTIONAL ARROWS, NUMBER OF FACES, ETC. WITH PLAN DRAWINGS. NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. NOTE F: FIXTURE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE WALL AND/OR CEILING THICKNESS PRIOR TO ORDERING. ` Y t . $ +•, b �� "a JAN 112017 City of -Tr kWila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUIWIll-A DEC 2 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 ;co 30 )00 j0rn - 0 M �O r �V00 7 .V) � C2 0� N )0 O LL Z W W O CCZ Z w H 2 CDQ k 0 0 cr W 0 z Q U) 1— Lo M I SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES PANEL CONDUCTORS H1 B -S3 Voltage An-pacity Phase Wire 480 / 200 3 4 A 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 Voltage Ampacity Phase Wi re 208 / 400 3 4 120 Brkr. Ckt Brkr. I Other Load Amp. PI. No- Ckt Brkr- Ph. No. Amp- PI. Brkr. Load Load Type(va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor I Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION AHU-1 Brkr. Load Ltg- Main Circuit Breaker (300A) Mounting RECESSED Aic Rating 10,000 Notes: x PROV ®E LOCK -ON DEV ICE DESCRIPTION Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt. Motor Kitch- Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Load Amp- I PI. No. Ckt Brkr. PK No. Amp.PI. Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt Motor Kitch. DESCRIPTION Other LTG: STUDIOS FRONT 1400 1 B 4 5420 5420 - 1400 201 1 1 A 2 20 1 1320 5420 540 1320 HWH-1 LTG: STUDIOS LEFT 1350 5 5420 25 7 A 8 25 1350 20 1 3 B 4 20 1 1130 9 1130 WASHER LTG: STUDIOS RIGHT 1400 - RCPT: STUDIO 5420 540 1400 20 1 5 C 6 30 PANEL A VIA XFMR 24961 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 2496 DRYER LTG: HALL 1450 425 425 EF -1 112.5 KVA 1450 20 1 7 A 8 2 2496 540 20 1 2496 - LTG: WALL / NL 1000 5000 38900 3 17 C 18 1 31 425 1000 20 1 9 B 10 30 0 2496 A 201 15 4251 2496 DRYER LTG: RESTIMECH 900 540 540 540 0 900 20 1 11 C 12 2 2496 1080 0 2496 - LIGHTING CONTROL 4251 425 - 1 300 300 20 1 13 A 14 20 1 1130 B 1130 WASHER EF -1 0 27 670 0 61 670 20 1 15 B 16 20 1 720 0 720 RCPT: ROOFTOP LTG: VAULT PENDANT 900 20 1 25 0 31 900 20 1 17 C 18 20 1 972 0 972 GARBAGE DISPOSAL EF -2 1 540 830 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 830 20 1 19 A 20 20 1 1200 1200 1620 SIGNAGE LTG:CENTER 1200 A 13810 5401 201 1131 10801 1200 20 1 21 B 22 20 1 360 1 360 RCPT: TELEPHONE RCPT: EQUIPMENT B 1 540 0 41 G 14210 540 20 1 23 C 24 20 1 1130 36 20 1130 WASHER RCPT: JAN RCPT: STUDIO 15 180 6701 73 PHASE 850 20 1 25 A 25 30 A B C 2496 Lighting 5-3 4.7 3.2 2496 DRYER FACP 31.2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 300 300 20 1 27 B 28 2 2496 6.6 5-3 5.0 16.9 2496 - PUMP PA 1620 1 16201 304 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR 304 20 1 29 C 30 20 1 0 80 20 SPARE LTG: HALL 1200 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 TOTAL 1200 20 1 31 A 321 20 11 0 0.0 Receptacles Remaining SPARE LTG: HALL 1100 0.0 900 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 11001 20 1 33 B 341 20 1 1 0 Total for Phase 12.1 13.4 13.3 ISPARE DAMPER 120V CKT Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. Panel Total Total Ampacity 19.4 54 200 200 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 I 0 SPARE PANEL B 14.5 40 31000 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 11 3 A B C 31000 200 0.0 0.0 0.0 37 A 38 10.0 0 9.0 9.0 9.0 13.5 Motors Largest ....................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0-0 33200 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 33200 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 39 B 40 0 Panel Total Total Ampacity 23.5 65 - 30200 30200 3 41 C 42 0 LOAD SUMMARY PHASE TOTAL PHASE A -B 0 BALANCING B -C Percentages 6 C -A 6 A B C Lighting 5.3 4.7 3.2 16A Receptacles Fist 10 Kw 31-2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 43.1 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 1.1 2.6 0.7 2.4 1.4 ............ 5.7 Kitchen 0-0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 6.6 5-3 5.2 17.1 Total for Phase 74.4 74.8 70.3 Panel Total Total Ampacity 93.7 260 KVA AMPS I SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS H1 B -S3 Voltage An-pacity Phase Wire 480 / 200 3 4 277 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- Main Circuit Breaker (200A) Mounting KMr;�5seD Aic Rating 22,000 Notes: ' PROVDE LOCK -ON DEVICE DESCRIPTION Load Type (va) Ltg- Rcpt Motor Kitch- Brkr. Ckt Brkr. I Other Load Amp. PI. No- Ckt Brkr- Ph. No. Amp- PI. Brkr. Load Load Type(va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor I Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION AHU-1 Brkr. Load Ltg- 3746 DESCRIPTION 3746 20 11 A 1 2 1 25 5420 5420 AHU-3 - 2 20 3746 720 3746 3 1 B 4 5420 5420 - - 3 3746 4 20 3746 3 5 C 6 3 5420 5420 540 AHU-2 1 540 5420 5 5420 25 7 A 8 25 .5420 5420 AHU4 - 1080 5420 1080 5420 9 B 10 54201 5420 - - RCPT: STUDIO 5420 540 5420 3 11 C 12 3 5420 5420 10 20 PANEL A VIA XFMR 5300 31200 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 6600 43100 150 13 A 141 15 425 425 EF -1 112.5 KVA 4-100134300 1100 540 5300 45400 15 B 161 425 425 540 20 1 32001307001 A 14 20 5000 38900 3 17 C 18 1 31 425 425 - 1 1260 20 1 15 0 19 A 201 15 4251 425 EF -2 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 540 540 0 21 B 221 42511 425 - 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 1080 0 23 C 24 3 4251 425 - 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 11 0 25 A 26 0 20 1121 540 B 22 20 1 1440 0 27 B 28 0 61 900 20 1 23 C 24 20 0 29 C 30 0 SPARE 540 0 20 1 25 0 31 A 32 0 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 12 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1080 1080 0 33 B 1 341 0 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1260 0 35 C 1361 0 C 30 20 1 16201 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 13 01 37 A 13810 5401 201 1131 10801 A 32 20 1 5401 1 0 39 B 14010 1260 1 1260 20 1 33 B 34 20 0 41 G 14210 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 6 540 LOAD SUMMARY 540 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 6 1260 73 PHASE 20 1 TOTAL A 38 20 PHASE BALANCING A -B B -C C -A Percentages 2 7 5 1620 A B C RCPT: STUDIO 15 Lighting 5-3 4.7 3.2 16.5 Receptacles First 10 Kw 31.2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 43.1 540 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................................... Remaining 1.1 20.9 20.9 20.9 1-4 62.6 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 6.6 5-3 5.0 16.9 Total for Phase 92.7 95-0 88.5 1620 1 16201 RCPT: STUDIO 16 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR Panel Total Total Ampacity 150.4 KVA 181 AMPS 0 540 I no 480-208/120v, 30 112.5 kVA TRANSFORMEI SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS B -S1 B -S3 B -S2 Voltage Ampacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- 3 7,662 Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 FFEDTHROUGH LUGS Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: DESCRIPTION Load Type (v a) Ltg. Rcpt I Motor Kdch- Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Other Load Amp. I PI. No- Ckt Brkr. PK No. Amp. I PI. Brkr. Load Ltg- Load Ty pe (v a) RcpL Motor Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 5 540 RCPT: STUDIO 17 540 20 1 1 A 2 20 1 720 720 RCPT: BREAK RM TVS RCPT: STUDIO 5 1440 1080 1440 20 1 3 B 4 20 1 1300 1300 RCPT: MICROWAVE RCPT: STUDIO 4 540 1 1 540 20 1 5 C 6 20 1 goo 900 RCPT: REFRIG. RCPT: STUDIO 1080 48 1080 20 1 7 A 8 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 540 49 540 20 1 9 B 10 20 1 12601 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 RCPT: STUDIO 1080 540 1080 20 1 11 C 12 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 3 540 C 540 20 1 13 A 14 20 1 1620 1620 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 3 12601 1 1260 20 1 15 B 16 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 540 540 20 1 17 C 18 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 1080 1 1080 20 1119 RCPT: STUDIO 27 A 20 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 11 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 60 540 20 1121 540 B 22 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 11 RCPT: STUDIO 2 900 61 900 20 1 23 C 24 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 12 SPARE 540 0 20 1 25 A 26 201 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 12 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1080 1080 20 1 27 B 28 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 22 1260 20 1 29 C 30 20 1 16201 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: STUDIO 1 540 540 5401 201 1131 10801 A 32 20 1 5401 1 540 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 1 1260 1 1260 20 1 33 B 34 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 6 540 72 540 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 6 1260 73 1260 20 1 37 A 38 20 1 1620 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 540 540 540 20 1 39 B 40 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 16 RCPT: STUDO7 1260 12601 20 1 41 C 42 20 1 1620 1 16201 RCPT: STUDIO 16 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 0 540 20 1 79 A 80 20 1 g00 PHASE RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 TOTAL PHASE A -B 10 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 0 9 81 A B C ffi Lighting 0.0 0-0 0.0 0.0 Receptacles Remaining 12.1 13.4 13.3 19.4 TOTAL 0.0 900 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ............ 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Total for Phase 12.1 13.4 13.3 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. Panel Total Total Ampacity 19.4 54 KVA AMPS 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 no 480-208/120v, 30 112.5 kVA TRANSFORMEI II L124 -J O 200A1 FRS 200A .L ------ I V i O - L-t--L� SERVICE GUTTER 480/277V, 30, 4W GROUNDING 2- + NEUTRAL BI ENCLOSURE TO TO TO METAL MADE BUILDING WATER ELECTRODE(S) STEEL / SERVICE PIPE ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NTS 1 E3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE B -S3 B -S2 Voltage Arnpacity Phase Wire Voltage Ampacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 FFEDTHROUGH LUGS DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Load Type (v a) Ltg. Rcpt Motor Kith. I Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr- Ckt Brkr. Load Amp. PI.. No. Ph. No. Amp, I PI. Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt Motor Koch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 17 540 540 20 1 43 A 44 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: TV'S RCPT: STUDIO 17 1260 1440 1260 20 1 45 B 46 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: TVS RCPT: STUDIO 18 540 540 20 1 1 540 20 1 47 C 48 20 1 01 1 1260 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 18 14401 201 1191 1440 20 1 49 A 50 20 1 0 1SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 18 540 93 B 540 20 1 51 B 52 201 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 26 RCPT: STUDIO 18 1260 C 196 20 1260 20 1 53 C 54 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 26 RCPT: STUDIO 19 540 198 20 1 540 20 1 55 A 56 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 27 RCPT: STUDIO 19 1440 11 1440 1440 20 1 57 B 58 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 27 RCPT: STUDIO 20 540 540 540 5401 20 1 59 C 60 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 28 RCPT: STUDIO 20 1080 RCPT: STUDIO 39 SPARE 1080 20 1 61 A 62 20 1 14401 1 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 28 RCPT: STUDIO 21 540 540 20 1 63 B 64 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 21 1260 0 1260 20 1 65 C 66 2DI 1 900 900 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 22 540 20 1 111 B 540 20 1 67 A 68 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 22 10801 114 20 1 1080 20 1j 69 B 70 20 1 1080 10801 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 23 540 0 540 20 1 71 C 72 20 1 540 5401 RCPT: STUDIO 30 RCPT: STUDIO 23 1440 SPARE SPARE 1440 2D 1 73 A 174 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUD1030 RCPT: STUDIO 24 540 540 20 1 75 B 76 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: BREAK RM RCPT: STUDIO 24 1440 1440 20 1 77 C 78 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 0 540 20 1 79 A 80 20 1 g00 900 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 lEt 1440 20 1 81 B ffi 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: BREAK RM WATER FEATURE/TV TOTAL 900 20 1 83 C 84 20 1 360 360 RCPT: GEN/TOILET LOAD SUMMARY Remaining 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 10-2 9.1 8.8 PHASE TOTAL Panel Total Total Ampacity 14.5 40 PHASE A -B 9 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 11 3 A B C Lighting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Receptacles First 10 Kw 11.9 13.9 11.3 37.1 10.0 Remaining 9.0 9.0 9.0 13.5 Motors Largest ....................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 . ............ 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 20.9 22.9 20.4 Panel Total Total Ampacity 23.5 65 KVA AMPS II L124 -J O 200A1 FRS 200A .L ------ I V i O - L-t--L� SERVICE GUTTER 480/277V, 30, 4W GROUNDING 2- + NEUTRAL BI ENCLOSURE TO TO TO METAL MADE BUILDING WATER ELECTRODE(S) STEEL / SERVICE PIPE ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NTS 1 E3.2 r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE B -S3 1 Voltage Arnpacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 2 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 -- DESCRIPTION Load Type (va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor Kitch- Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Load Amp. PI. No. Ckt Brkr. Ph. No. Amp. I PI. I Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Ty pe (v a) RcpL Motor Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 31 540 540 20 1 85 A 86 20 1 0 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 31 1440 1440 20 1 87 B 88 20 1 0 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 32 540 540 20 1 89 C 90 20 1 54.0 540 RCPT: STUDIO 36 RCPT: STUDIO 32 1 1260 12601 201 1191 A 92 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 36 RCPT: STUDIO 33 540 5401 20 il 93 B 94 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 37 RCPT: STUDIO 33 1080 1080 20 1 951 C 196 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 37 RCPT: STUDIO 34 540 540 20 1 971 A 198 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUD[038 RCPT: STUDIO 34 1620 1 1620 20 1 99 B 100 20 11 1440 1 14401 1 IRCPT:STUDIO38 RCPT: STUDIO 35 540 540 20 1 101 C 102 20 11 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 39 RCPT: STUDIO 35 1620 1620 20 1 103 A 104 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 39 SPARE 0 20 1 105 B 106 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 40 SPARE 0 20 1 107 C 108 20 1 12601 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 40 SPARE 0 20 1109 A 110 20 1 01 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 111 B 112 20 1 01 SPARE SPARE 0 2DI 1 113 C 114 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 115 A 116 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 117 B 118 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 119 C 1201 20 1 0 SPARE SPACE 01 121 A 122 0 SPACE SPACE 0 123 B 124 0 SPACE SPACE 0 125 C 126 0 SPACE LOAD SUMMARY PHASE TOTAL PHASE A -B 11 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 4 14 A B C Lighting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rece tacleS First 10 Kw 7.2 6.1 5.8 19.1 10.0 Remaining 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 10-2 9.1 8.8 Panel Total Total Ampacity 14.5 40 KVA AMPS r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE LET -THROUGH 1 24,268 -- 2 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- 4 6,727 -- BASED ON A 500 KVA PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER. r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 FEEDER SCHEDULE KEY CONDUCTORS METALALLIC CONDUIT LI(IN) CONDUIT (IN) 1 2 3 3#1/0+#6G 4#350+#2G 4#3/0+#6G 1-1/2 3 2 -- -- -- REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CODE FOR INSTALLATION NATIONAL OF CONDUIT TYPE. r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The following supplements all sections of this specification and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection. installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the drawings, and its derivery to the Owner complete in all respects ready for use. 1.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Plan all work so that it proceeds With a minimum of interference With other trades. Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit required in the Wilding construction for dWcal work and provide all special frames, sleeves and anchor bob as required. Coordinate the electrical work With the mechanical installotion. B. Work rines and establimhed heights shall be in strict accordance With architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specirmations extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all devations and detailed dimensions not shown. C. Lay out and coortrinate oil work well enough in advance to avoid confricts or interferences With other work in progress so that in case of interference the electrical layaut may be aftered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's resporroWdy. 1.04 COOPERATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS A. Perform this work in conformity with the construction called for by other trades and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Property connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere With their work B. Examine the drawings and specifications for the general and mechanical work and the work of other similar trades. Coordinate this work accoffingly, C. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which Wight pmvent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. 1.05 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Certain materials and equipment will be furnished under other sections and installed or connected under this section. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment Will be furnished by other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed. 1.06 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Work under these sections is shown in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, indicating the general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow these drawings in laying out the work and verify Spam for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended locatkin of outlets or equipment obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.07 EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES A. Equipment and fixtures shall be connected providing circuit continuity in accordance with applicable codes whether or not each Mece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such hims of equipment or fixtures, and the point of circuit origin. 1.08 NEW EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials of the same type or classification, and used for the some purpose, shall be products of the some manufacturer. Use only new, unweathered, and unused material, except as specifically noted. 1.09 PRODUCT USTING A. All mateni I I ent and devices shall be listed With Underwriters Laboratories (U or other notionally recognized testing agency and be furnished With a label indicating such listing. B. All required material, equipment and devices for projects in New York City, NY shall be litsted With the New York City Department of Buildings and be furnished with a Materials and Acceptance (MEA) number. C. All required material, equipment and devices for projects where the Owne?s insurance carrier is Factory Mutual (FM) shall be listed with Factory Mutual (FM) and be fumished With a label indicating such r1sting. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner and arign, level and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install equipment so that all parts am easily accessible for inspection, operation, maiintenance and repair. B. Where marring or disfigurement has occurred, replace or refinish the damaged surfaces as directed and to the satisfaction of the Architect. C. Supplementary Framing 1. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting electrical equipment 2. Provide froming members of standard rolled steel shapes, A-36 steel. Provide members welded to structural members equal to the specification for the main structural member. Provide Isimple bearrr type frarring with end connections welded or bolted for shear loads. Use contilevers when detailed or specifically approved by the ArWAect. The Architeces approval is required for location of supplementary framing. Use only certified welders where directed by Architect. 3. Design framing members for their actual loods, With allowable stresses specified by AISC, Without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vilration, in accordance with standard structural practices. Show on shop drawing supplementary framing, inducting design loads, member size and location. 4. When supplementary framing is indicated, verify that dimensions are suidable for the equipment fumished. Provide additional strength when equipment fumished is heavier than that specified. 3.02 OUTLET LOCATION A. Position of Outlets 1. Center all outlets with regard to panering, furring, and trim. Symmetrically arrange outlets in the room. Satisfactorily correct outlets improperly boated or installed. Repair or replace damaged firfmhes. Set outlets Numb and extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor Without projecting beyond some. 2. Install symmetrically all receptacles, switches. and outlets shown on the wood trim, and where necessary, set the long dimension of the plate horizontal, or ganged in tandem. B. Mounting heights, to the center of the box above finished floor, shall be as follows unless otherwise shown or indicated. Other mounting heights are incricated on the drawings by detaiii or by a plus dimension shown adjacent to the symbol. 1. Flush tumbler switches: 48 inches 2. Convenience receptacles: 18 inches 3. Telecommunications devices. 18 inches 4. Safety switches: 54 inches to operator 5. Television outlets- 18 inches 6. Panelboords: 72 inches to top 7. Fire alarm control panel: 72 inches to top B. Fire alarm notification appliances: Lens located above 80 inclies or 6 inches below ceiling, whichever is lower 3.03 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Cutting, Patching and Piercing 1. Obtaim written permitssion of the Architect before cutting or piercing structural members. 2. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective trades for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of drywall and finishing of materials inducting carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this work. Do not weaken walls, partitions or floors with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes. Patching and/or refinishing Will be determined by Archittect. 3. Sleeves through floors and walls to be black iron pipe, or paper, flush with walls, ceiffings or finished floors, sized to accommodate the raceway 4. Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part Miercing the waterproofing has been set in Mace, seal opening and make absolutely watertight. 5. Provide chrome -plated spring-cripped escutcheon Oates where exposed pipe passes through walls, floors or cetTing. Cover sleeves and entire opeWing made for the pipe Wb escutcheon plates. Provide air and watertight conduit openings through floor slabs, masonry wait% and continuous partitions. Tightly caulk space between conduit and building materials with asbestos mpe and non-flammable sealant B. searing: Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make weathertight and insed:proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress. C. Identification of Equipment- Provide for piece of e each juipment including disconnect switches and motor starter, a 3/64 thick, 10 minimum height white plastic 'Lamicoid" plate identificatkin tog with Wack letters. Use Whilionil' industrial adhesive by Goodyear, or equal, for mounting nameplates. Clearly identify on the Plow the equipment served and spell out the full name of the equiement such as "gr Handring Unit MU -11* and 'Hot Water Cir. Pump P-1 in rieu of abbreviated plan references such as "MU -1' or *P-1." D. Access to Equipment: Locate starters, switches, receptacles and pull boxes to provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance, and if concealed, provide acems doom Provide fire rated access doors where required by the fire resistance rating of the wall or coMing in which the door is installed. E. Protection of Apparatus, Materials and Equipment- Take such precoutions as necessary to property pratect all apparatim fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. The Architect may reject any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus, or equipment scratched, dented or otherwise damaged. F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the time of the contract and before final approval of the electrical installation, submit to the Architect two (2) copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data, wiring diagrams arid parts list of each item of electrical equipment installed under this contract as determined by the Architect. Submit all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. G. Painting Preparutbir Prepare all fittings, boxes, supports and parielboards, exposed to the weather, for painting by removing therefrom all oil, grease and dirt. Employ the necessary precautionary methods to prieverit scratching or defacing of all electrical apparatus and devices. H. Rust Prevention: Provide hot dip galvanized components for ferrous materials exposed to the weather. Provide a minimum of one coat of rust inhibiting primer paint for all materials after fabrication. color as selected by the Architect. 1. Tests: Provide the tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quarAy, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each WAm. Tests Will be conducted under the supervision of the Architect. J. Fire and Smoke Partition Penetrations 1. The Contractor shall familliarize himself With all fire rated construction and install his work so as to maintain the integrity of the fire code rating. Malintain rating of fire rated and smoke rated construction. Sleeves shall be steel or pre -manufactured sleeves similar to Pipe Shields, Inc., for bare Ope through fire walls and floors. model WFB, DFI3 or QDFB- For plaft Ope, use type WFB With one inch thick calcium silicate insulation encosed in metal sleeve extension two feet either side of fire rated, walls or floor. 1 2. Seal annular space around piping. I" fire and smoke rated floors, walls and partitions, use UL Wed maWal that rnaiintains fire rated wall and floor integrity, similar to RIV foam. Dow Coming 'Fire StW or Pipe Shields, Inc., model'WFB, DFB or QDFB. For non -rated walls and partitions, use Wineral or glass fiber insulation. K. Existing Conditions: For projects invoking a tenant improvement or renovation or remodel of an existing space: I 1. Existing conditions shown are based on as -built or shell drawings provided by the Owner and possibly limited field verification. The Contractor shall adjust for actual field conditions at no additional expense to the owner. 2. The Contractor shall famiriarize himself with the work prior to bidding and start of work. i 3. Remove all equipment devices. fixtures, conduits, supports, hangers, etc., not shown that am required to be removed in order to complete the new work. Recessed boxes and conduits concealed Within walls or floors that are to remain may be abandoned in place as long as the operiiings are patched and the conductors removed. 4. it is the responsibility of the contractor to dispose of all i equipment not mused as part of the new work. The Owner shall have first sakage rights on all materials and equipment. ' 5. Maintain continuity of circuits as needed to provide power to remaining devices, fixtures, or equipment not being removed. L Submittal Data: Within thirty days after award of contract furnish the Architect five shop drowing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cuts of all equipment to be used on this project. In these portforios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on drawings or scheduW. M. Codes. Permits and Fees 1. Perform work in accordance With the National Electrical Code and other appricable codes. Comply With applicable buildiing ordinances and codes. Where the contract documents exceed minimum requirements, the contract documents take precedence. 2. Comply With all requirements for permits, ricenses, fees and codes. Permids, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified. 3. Comply With the requirements of the applicable utirAy companies serving this project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coonfination of the work. N. Applicable Documents and Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials fumished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE 2. National Electrical Manufactureirs' Association - NEMA 3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - U.L 4. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 5. Federal Specifications - FED. SPEC. 6. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 7. American Standards Association - ASA 8. National Electrical Code - NEC 9. National Electrical Safety Code - NESC END OF SE10 101i IMM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RACEWAYS, DEVICES AND WIRING: A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Provide all raceway and wiring systems complete with all devices and coverplates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. All raceways shall be UL approved. B. Rigid Steel Conduit, Provide Anc-cooted rigid steel conduit conforming to Fed. Spec. WW -C-581. Provide conduit fitungs conforming to Fed. Spec. W -F-408. C. Electrical Metalfic Tubing: Provide sted electrical metallic tubing conforrring to Fed. Spec. WW -C-563. Provide UL approved raintight fittings for box connectors and conduit couplings. Set screw or indenter type fittings will not be approved. D. Flexible Metallic Conduit:- Provide flexile conduit, zinc -coated, single strip type, UL approved. Use American Bruss "Sealtite* or approved equal, flexible, liquid -tight conduit in damp or wet locations. E Surface Metal Raceways: Provide a two-piece steel raceway, complete with fittings, manufactured by the Viremold Company, or approved equal. Provide raceway size required for the number of conductors, or as specified on the drawings. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Provide conduit fittings as described below. Catalog numbers shown are Appleton Electric Company. Steel City and Raco are equally acceptable. 1. EMT couprings: 6000S Series 2. EMT connectom: 7000S Series 3. Insulating bushings (1 1/4' and larger): BEILI Series 4. Flexible conduit straight box connectors: 728 Series 5. Flexible conduit angle box connectors. 738 Series 6. Searing gland assembly- O-Z/Gedney Type FSK 7. Expansion joints. O-Z/Gedney Type AX or TX With boncring jumpers and clamps 8. Expansion and deflection fittings: O-Z/Gedney Type DX 9. Cast metal conduit fittings. Crouse-Hiinds `C�ndulets* 2.03 BUILDING WIRE A. Provide copper conductors with insulation rated for 60OV, conforming to Fed. Spec. J -C-30. B. Unless otherwise specified, provide surd Type THWN or THHN for all conductors 10 AWG and smaller. C. Unless otherwise specified, provide stranded Type THN, THWN or THHN for all conductors 8 AWG and larger. D. Provide Type THHN (90 degree C, dry locations) for branch circuit conductors in fixtures UL approved for end to end assembly and in recessed or surface mounted fixtures. Conform with the National Electrical Code for fixture wiring and specifically to the temperature of the enclosure and to the wet or dry location. E Feeders, Branch Circuits and Control Circuits: Provide 12 AWG Winimurn branch circuit wire size. Provide 14 AWG control circuits, unless otherwise specified or required by branch circuit protection. F. Low Voltage Lighting or Control Wiring: Provide minimum 18 AWG, Type TFF, thermoplastic insulated cable for each conductor. Voltage rating of cable shall be suitable for either a Class I or Class 11, remote control or signal circuit, as determined by the NEC and the actual installation. 2.04 CABLE A. Armored Cable �ype AC): Provide armored cable With copper conductors, thermoplastic insulation. 600 volt insulation voltage rating, 75 degree C insulation temperature rating, interlocking steel strip armor, and grounding conductor. The armor is not permitted to be utilized as the equipment grounding conductor. No exceptions. B. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC): Provide metal clad cable with copper conductors, thermoplastic insulation, 600 volt insulation voltage rating, 75 degree C insulation temperature rating, interlocking steel or aluminum metal tape armor, and grounding conductor. The armor is not permitted to be utilized as the equipment groundiing conductor. No exceptions. 2.05 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide outlet boxes as described below. Catalog numbers shown are Appleton Electric Company. Steel City and Raco are equally acceptable. 1. Concealed lighting boxes: 140-3/4 2. Concrete lighting boxes: OCR Series 3. Exposed righting boxes: 14S-3/4 or J40-3/4 4. Flush switch, receptacle, telephone and junction boxes: #4S-3/4 or 1225 where separate extension or plasta ring cannot be used 5. Exposed switch, receptacle. telephone and junction boxes: FS Series 1 6. Switch and telephone boxes concealed in narTow mulliorw. Bell Electric Co. 147. #448, or 1449 B. Where space is rimited, I 4CS-3/4 handy boxes may be used for switch, receptacle and telephone outlets With specific approval only. C. Provide extension and drywall rings as required. D. Size outlet boxes in accordance With the allowable fill permitted by the National Electrical Code. 2.06 PULL BOXES A. Provide code gage galvanized sheet metal sized as per National Electrical Code or as shown on the drawings. Provide retnovable cover on the largest access side of the box unless otherwise detailed. Where cost boxes are specified, provide conduit entrances With threaded hubs. Provide stainless steel screws in all extedor locations and in wet or damp locations. 2.07 SWITCHES A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are Leviton, Equal devices manufactured by Cooper Viring Devices, Pass and Seymour/Legrand, Bryant Electric, and Hubbell are acceptable. B. Provide all devices of same manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. C. Deice colors shall be coordinated With the Architect. D. Provide flush tumbler switches conformilng to Fed. Spec. W -S -896c, 20 amp, industrial grade, quiet type, 120-277V switch rating with UL approval for tungsten [amp bads or inductive bads, wiftiout derating. Provide switches as follow. DECORA STYLF, 20 AMP. 1. Single pole: 2. Single pole locking: 2.08 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are LeAm. Equal devices manufactured by WattStopper and Sensor Switch am acceptable. B. Provide or devices of some manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. C. Device colors shall be coordinated with the ArchiRect. D. All occupancy sensors shall be suitable for the geometrical and environmental chameWatics of the associated space shall be suitable for the minimum floor area to be covered, shall be the proper voltage, and shall carry a load rating greater than the bad controlled for the opropriate load type. Provide occupancy sensors as follows: 1. Wall -Switch: DECORA STYLE 2. Ceiling Mount- OSC Series for urfds requiring power packs, ODC Series for self-contained units. 2.09 RECEPTACLES A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are Leviton. Equal devices manufactured by Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass and Seymour/Legrand. Bryant Electric, and Hubbell are acceptable. B. Provide all devices of same manufacturer, unless indicated otheWm C. Device colors shall be coordinated with the Architect. D. Provide grounding type receptacles conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-596, With the ground connection made through an extra pole. Provide receptacles as follow. DEC= STYI& 20 AMP. 1. Standard Simplex: 2. Standard Duplex: 3. Standard GFCI: E Receptacles denoted "W shall be provided With neoprene gasketed coverplates and #5977 -CL raintight whie-in-use covers. 2.10 COVERPLATES A. Provide STAINLESS STEEL coverplates WERE VISIBLE AND WHITE NYLON WHERE HIDDEN. Install blank coverplates on all boxes without devices or fixtums of some type as installed on devices in that room or area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAYS A. Install Wiring in metal raceways. B. Install raceways concealed, in general, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on the plans. C. Provide rWid conduit for raceways embedded in concrete, in outside walls, in earth, below floor slabs -on -grade, exposed to weather, in hazardous areas, in refrigerated areas, in the mechanical equipment moms, for feeders, and for exposed installations where subject to damage. Other raceways may be rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing at the Ctintructors option unless otherwise specified. D. Provide flexible conduit for all motors, transformer and equipment connections subject to vibration. E. Continuity: Provide continuous metallic raceways from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Enter and secure conduit to all boxes, to provide electrical continuity from the point of service to outlets. Provide locknuts and bushings on terminals of metallic conduits. F.- Size: Use raceways no smaller than 3/4 inch. except that 1/2 inch may be used for switch legs consisting of not mom than 2 wires. Control circuit Wiring specified to be 14 ANG wire may utilize 1/2 inch raceway or larger as required. G. Raceways in Earth: Point metalric raceways buried and beneath slob -on - grade with one heavy continuous coat of asphalt varnish ofter assembly of conduit and fittings. H. Exposed Raceways: Run exposed raceways in straight lines at right angles or parallel with walls, beams or columns. 1. Raceways in Plaiin Concrete: Do not Mace raceways in Main concrete, such as cement toppings on structural floors, without special approval. Install, however, in non -reinforced concrete headers provided for their installation. J. Raceways Through Roof- Where raceways penetrate the roof seal, provide suitable pitch pockets or lead flashing. Submit shop drawings or method to be used, for approval. K. Raceways Entering the Building Below Grade: Provide raceways with galvanized cast-iron wall entrance seals, having a watertight sealing gland assembly. L Raceways in Furred Spaces. Install raceways in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Do not anchor or strap conduits to the ceiling furring channels or attach to furred ceiling hanger wires Without the Architect's written approval. M. Straps and Hangers: Substantially support raceways by straps, suitable damps or hangers, to provide a rigid installation. Perforated strup, hangers and twisted Wire attachments Will not be acceptable. Do not support or fasten raceways to other pipe, or in a manner to prevent the ready removal of other pipe. N. Joints and Connections- Make watertight all couprings and thnxided connections in threaded conduit Cut all joints square, mom smooth, and property thread. Fit all box connections With a minimum of two nripmM Inek aids and one steel, plastic or fiber hushirk3 form;nq an approved tight bond With box. Provide locknuts both inside and outside of the enclimm to which the conduit is alladied. Use raintight compression type fittings for electrical metallic tubing systems and use at least one lodmut on the inside of each enclosure entry. Provide grounding locknuts or bushilngs where required in Section 162DO 3 -OZ 'Grounding. - 0. Stub Ups: Extend rVid steel conduit stubs at least one foot above slab or MI. before connection is made to electrical metallic tubing. P. Threads: Clean all threads of rigid conduit. Coat all mate threads of all steel conduid installed underground or in or under concrete slab with red or while lead immediately before being coupled together. Q. Running Threads: Use "Dickson* or approved equal couplings in lieu of running threads. R. Protection: Cap raceways stubbed up, including those in cabinets. immedia* upon their installation. The use of paper or rag wads will not be perWtted. S. Expansion Joints- Provide raceways crossing expansion joints with 0- Z/Gedney Type AX fitting with Type A) bonding jumper for rigid conduit and Type TX fitting With Type TJ bonding jumper for electric metallic , tubing. Where differential settlement may occur, use Type DX fittings. T. Exterior Conduits: Install raceways containing electric service cables not less than 36 inches below finished grade. U. General Location Requirements: Use care in locating raceways in close proximity to heating duct, sleam and hot water fines. Where such crossings are unavoidable, clear covering of line by at least 6 inches. Ali raceway runs shown are diagrammatic. Determine exact locations in the field except where dimensions am specified on the drawings. 3.02 OUTLET BOXES AND PULL BOXES A. Rigidly mount all boxes and provide With suitable screw fastened covers. Plug open knock -outs or holes in boxes with suitable Wanking devices. B. Install pull boxes in locations that will be accessible after completion of the building. Provide pull boxes or junction boxes to firnit conduit runs to 125 feet and to limik angles to the equivalent of 270 degrees. Additional pull boxes may be provided to facilitate vim putting. 3.03 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors continuous from outlet to outlet and splice only at outlet or junction boxes. B. Circuiting: Circuit all feeders and branch circuits as shown on the plans. Approval of the Architect is required for deviations from the plans. C. Solices and Terminations 1. Provide electrically and mechanically secure splices, tops, lug connections, etc. 2. Utilize solderless connectom designed for only one combination of conductors when making splices or taps in conductors 8 AWG or larger. 3. Utilize pre -insulated connectors equal to 3M Company "Scotchlok! electrical song connectors or Ideal Industries Inc. 'Wing -Nut" for splices and tops in conductors 10 AWG and smaller. These connectors must also be provided for factory -made splices in fixtures or equipment. Obtain kch&ecfs approval prior to using any other twist -on connectors. 4. Leave sufficient stock cable at all sprices and terminations, boxes, etc., to insure conductors at the bushing are not Winding. 5. Pressure indent type connectors must be submitted to the Architect for approval. 6. Provide all power and control conductors, that terminate on equipment or terminal strips, with solderiess lugs or fork and flanged tongue terminals. Provide tongue terminal equal to Thomas & Betts "Sta-Kon. The above type of conductor ternimation is not required when the equipment is provided with solderless connectors. 7. Tape joints with vinyl plastic tape as manufactured by 3M Company, or an approved equal. Use sufficient tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined. B. Keep splices in underground junction boxes, handholes, and manholes to an absolute minilmum. Where splices are necessary, use resin pressure sprom and resin spriding kits manufactured by 3M Company to totally encapsulate the sprice. D. Wire sizes shown are minimum based on code requiremients, voltage drop and/or other considerations. E Sizes of wires and cabin indicated or specified am American Wire Gage (Brawn and Sharpe). F. Armored cable (Type Ad) may be substituted for win and conduit systems at the Electrical Contriactor's option, only where approved by Iocd and national codes and amendments. G. Metal clad (Type MC) cable may be substituted for Vim and conduit systems at the Electrical Conliacicir's option, only where approved by local and national codes and amendments. 3.04 LUBRICATION A. Where lubrication is required for putting cables, use a compound specifically prepared for cable pulling. 3.05 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION (UNDER 600 VOLTS) A. Identify phase, circuit, and voltage at each panel, pull box. jundion box and switch. Provide waterproof non-metallic bonds or identification togs for each conductor. B. Color code all conductors With Insulation colored as follows: PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this secUon of the work are specified in Section 16000, *General Provisions.0 The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The electrical service to the building is as indicated on the drawings. 1.03 GROUNDING A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' B. Ground the electrical system completely and effectively, as required by the National Electrical Code and as specified hereinafter. C. Provide all ground systems and make connections mechanically secure and electrically continuous. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EIECTRICAL SEINCE A. Arrange With the servicing utilities and pay all costs and fees for services indicated on the drawings. All work shall be in accordance With serving company's standards and subject to their approval. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Raceways: Install metallic raceways mechaniedly and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment Bond all metallic raceways together, with a ground conjuctor, and connect to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide separate green equipment grounding conductor for all electrical raceways, to effectively ground all panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior righting standards, and non-current carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, busses, etc., for this purpom Connect the equipment ground to the buViing system ground. Use the some size equipment grounifing conductors as phase conductors, up through 8 AWG. See drawings for conductor size with phase conductors 6 AWG and larger. C. Receptacles: Permanently connect the ground tertnimal on each receptacle to the green ground conductor. D. Ductwork: Provide a fleodble ground drop, 6 AWG equivalent at each flexible duct connection at each air handier, exhaust fan, and supply fan, and install to preclude vibration. E Motors. Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a baked soldedess lug. Botts, screws and washers shall be bronze or cadmium Mated steel. 3.03 TESTS A. Provide the tests as outrined hereinafter and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each system. 3.04 FINAL TESTS A. Start final tests after the work described in these specifications has been completely installed in accordance with the true spirit and intent of these specifications and after complete preliminary tests have been made which indicate adequacy, quality, completion and satisfactory operation. These final tests am comprised of the following: 1. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each panelboard and switchboard in the project. Where the equipment manufacturer includes an Electrical Test Report With the equipment the manufacturer's report outline shall be used. 2. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each motor 1/2 horsepower and larger. Where the equipment manufacturer includes a Motor Test Report With the equipment, the monufacturer's report outrine shall be used. B. The Contractor shall submit the above completed 'Reportso to the Architect in dupficate, noUng all deviations from requirements limted below. 1. Plus or minus 5 percent nominal system voltage and no-load voltage, or a plus or minus 5 percent between no bad and full bad voltage. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent variation between rated and actual motor current. 3. Plus or mimus 10 percent variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents. The Contractor shall balance phase currents of all distributbri equipment, wiWin the tolerances mentioned above. 4. Insulation resistance between conductors and ground less than 1,000,000 ohms, unless permirtled by NEC. 3.05 FINAL CORRECTIONS A. Correct promptly arry failure or defects revealed by these tests as determined by the Architect. Reconduct tests on these corrected items as directed by the ArchilecL EW OF SIMMI 1=0 SEM I REMIM DIS11111IRM SVSFFH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PANEWDS, CABINETS AND SAFETY SWITCHES A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions! The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 160DO, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extiint required by the references thereto. B. Provide all panel boards and cabinets inducring breakers, bus bars, hinged door, lock trim, and all appurtenances for a complete and satisfactory instalkition. C. Provide all fused switches and non-fused safety switches for circtil: protection and disconnect proposes. D. Square 'D' equipment is mentioned herein to establish quality and general requirements. Comparable equipment manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, or Eaton/Cutler-Hammer may be submitted for approval during shop drawing period. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. WiWin thirty days after award of contract furnish the architect five shop drawiing portfolios (bound caries) containiing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all distribution equipment to be used on this project. In these portforicis use manufacturer's specification sheets, Identified by equipment name, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picture, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Voltages. 3. Ampacitles. 4. Fault current ratings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANE1BOARDS (24W CLASS) A. Provide Square 'D` Comparry Type NOOD dead front panelboard With bolt - on circuit breakers. Provide minimum box dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5 3/4 inches deep. Provide minimum 5 inch top and bottom gutter, not including ground bus space, and 6 inch minimum side gutters. All pointed parts shall be pointed with the manufacturer's standard color baked enamel over a phosphate pretreated surface. Rate panelboord for a minimum of 10,000 amps, symmetrical interrupting capacity. B. Provide 100% capacity aluminum or copper phase busses and neutral bus. Provide 100% capacity copper ground bus. C. Provide copper insulated isolated ground bus for ponelboords serving isolated ground loads. D. Provide zinc -coated sheet steel cabinet conforrWing to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. Except when boated outdoors, provide NEMA 1 enclosure. I- Provide trims with adjustable trim clamps. FA trims With hinged doors having combination, lock and latch. Provide hardware on flush doors and trims, with all beads or similar projections on the inside. When installed, the trim arid door must present a smooth, flush appearance. Provide disc tumbler locks, all keyed alike. F. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic cover and metal frame on the inside of each door. Mount a typewrittm directory, properly identifying each eircuit, under the dear plastic cover. G. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background dearly indicating the name of the panelboard. H. Provide split -bus, sub -feed lugs, feed -through lugs, sub -feed protectivii devices and contadom, if any, as indicated on the drawings or specified in this or other sections of these specifications. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide for panelboard use, molded plastic case, air circuit breakers conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-375. B. Provide breakers with thiernrid magnetic trip units, and a common trip bar for two- or three -pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip oil poles of each breaker. C. Pro" breakers of the trip-fme and trip -indicating boft-on type, with quick -make, quick -break contacts. Provide single two- or thme- pole breaker interchangeability. D. Provide interchangeable rating Mugs/trip units for circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger. E Provide solid-state molded case circuit breakers with electronic writing, timmg and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings for circuit breakers with frame sizes 1200 amperes and larger. Provide adjustable current settings for ground fault trip and instantaneous trip, adjustable pickup, and ground fault sensing integral With circuit breaker. F. Provide RACR rated circuit breakers for circuit breakers that serve heating, ventilation or &-conditioning equipment. G. Provide shunt trip cogs where required. H. Provide Class A ground fault circuit interrupting type circuit breakers where required. 1. In jurisdictioris that have adopted the 2008 (or subsequent) version of the National Electrical Code, provide handle ties for all single pole circuit breakers that serve circuits comprising a mulllwire branch circuit to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors in the multiwire branch circuit. J. Tandem or buff -sized circuit breakers am not permitted. 2.03 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide NEMA Type HD safety switches With quick -make, quick -break mechanism. 'Bonderize or approved equal, prime and finlish all enclosures to resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance. Intedock cover with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the 'offo position. NEMA 1 enclosure is standard except as noted or required. Provide NEMA 31? enclosures for sviitches exposed to the weather except where noted otherwise. B. Provide appropriate fuse crips for safety switches that am incricated to be fused. C. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background clearly indicating the name of the load served. 2.04 FUSES A. For mains and feeders rated at 600 amps or less, provide Bussmann current rimiting time delay Class RKI fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RMS. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferruz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the same manufacturer. B. For maiins and feeders rated at more than 600 amps, provide Bussmann Class L time delay fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RM& Equivalent fuses manufactured by Litteffuse or Fwaz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. C. For motor protection, provide Bussmiann Class RKI time delay or Class L time delay fuses. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferraz Shawmut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. 2.05 AUXILIARY SYSTEM CABINETS A. Provide zinc -coated sheet "I cabinet conforming to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. . Provide a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturers standard color on trim and doors. Except where specified otherwise, provide NEMA I enclosure. B. Provide cabinets With interior dimensions not less than those inifficated on the drawings. Each trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush catch. Provide flush hardware on all flush doors and trims With all beads or similar projections, on the inside. When installed, the trim and door must present a smooth. flush appearance. C. Size doors to provide maximum size openings to the box interiom Provide boxes With a 3/4 inch weatherproof grade plywood buckboard having a two -coat insulating varnish finish, for telephone termination and where shown. Coordinate size with Telephone Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORT A. Property align distribution equipment and adequately support independent of the connecting raceways. Provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the support of the equipment. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Where distribution equipment is installed during construction, Mace temporary covers over the openings at all times, except when work is Wing performed therein. 3.03 INSULATION A. Where distribution equipment is flush mounted in an outside wall. insulate the back and am of cabinet With 1/2 inch rigiid fiberglass insulation. 3.04 FUSES A. Provide fuses at all locations shown on the drawings or required for supplemental protection. B. Deriver to the Owner at the time of final inspection, one spare set of 3 fuses for each type, size and voltage installed. C. Provide instruction label for all fuses installed, indicating fuse type, size and description. 3.05 PHASE BALANCE A. Balance all phase loads to Within 10 percent END OF SEEM 10300 PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisiion&" The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Ptovisions,' form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The luminaim catalog numbers listed on the drawling indicate manufacturer, lumimaire design, appearance, etc., desired. These lueindires shall be modified, if necessary, to comMy with the subsequent specification. C. Provide, complete in all respects, all luminaires shown on the drawiings. Where 8 foot lurnimaires are shown on the drawings and a 4 foot lurninaire scheduled, furnish tandem 4 foot luminaires or two 4 foot individual units. Luminaires specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of luminaires of other manufacturers. The sole and final judgment of substitutions lies With the Architect. D. All luminaires must bear the Underwriters Laboratories label. E All luminaire component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages. The shipment from the luminaire manufacturer shall include integrally mounted and/or remote mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the luminaire lamps. F. If luminaires specified herein are discontinued after the contract for the work is executed, provide suitable substitute luminaires, Without additional cost as directed by the ArchitecL G. Accept all responsibility for coordination of substituted luminaires with the balance of the building construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contract fumish the architect five shop drawling portforms (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and candlepower distribution curves of all luminaires to be used on this project. In these portfolios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on lumindire schedule, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picittim, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Coefficients of utilirzation by an approved testing laboratory. 3. Candlepower distribution by an approved testing laboratory. 4. Lumindire brightness by an approved testing laboratory. 5. Fusing and type of ballast provided. 6. Certification of plastic materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires 1. Lumindires shall be constructed of steel, rust protected With a five -stage metal prefinishing process, and finished with baked white enamel of the acrylic base or alkyd base type. The entire luminaire shall be finished in this manner except where non- fermus reflecting surfaces or louvem are specified. 2. Luminaires shall be designed for maximum heat dissipation so that under operating conditions of a 90 degrees F. ambient raw temperature, the ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 3. Reflector glass shall be 30 percent minimum measured in accordance with ASTM Method D -523-53T (60 degrees). 4. Provide a reflectance of 85 percent rnmimum on all surfaces measured with an integrating sphere -type reffectometer. 5. Where the luminaires specified require the use of plastic lenses, materials of the highest quarAy conforming to the following requirements: a. Use 100 percent virgin acryllic thermoplastic. b. All raw material used must be of a quality to exceed IES -SPI - NEVA specifications by at least 100 percent This will permit a maximum of 3 units of yellowling factor with 2,000 hours of exposure in a fade -o -meter. The lumindire manufacturer shall fumish a guarantee that 3 units of yellowing will not be exceeded after 15 years of luminuire use, on a 10 -hour day, 7 -day week basis. B. Ballasts 1. Ballasts shall be Motorola Electronic ballasts, or approved equal. Ballasts shall be rapid start and operate at a frequency of 25 KHz, or higher. Ballasts shall have a minimum power factor of .99 and shall not exceed 10% THD. Balkists shall bear the UL label, Class P. 2. Ballasts shall be securely mounted Within luminaires to eliminate vitirution noise and to provide adequate heat transfer. 3. Ballosts operaUng 4,30 mliliamp lamps shall have a sound rating of W. C. Emergency Ballasts I. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a Wininum of 1100 lumens and capable of supporting two kimps. 2. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing compact D. Lamps fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a rifinimum of 950 lumens. 1. Provide energy saving 78 'Octron* lamps as manufactured by Sylvaniia and as scheduled on the drawings. TWirly-two wait mod start 4100 degree lamps shall have an initial rating of 2900 lumens. 2. Fumish all fluorescent lamps mode by the some lamp manufacturer in order to match color phosphors. 3. Provide low mercury content type fluorescent lamps. 4. *Bum -in' all fluorescent lamps controlled by dimmers for a Winimurn of 100 hours prior to placing in dimmed luminaire. 2.02 INCANDESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Lumindires- Provide incandescent luminaires that hove been designed for a maximum temperature of 90 degrees C at the point of contact With the ceiling. B. Lamps: Provide 120 volt lamps, unless noted otherviiise, conforming to Federal Specification WL -101. Provide frosted or clear bulb, shape (A19, A23, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories including drywall frames. sterns, canoiMes, cords, toggle bofts, etc., necessary to mount the luminaire in a proper and approved method. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware, trim rings, etc. for the type of ceiling specified. Coordinate Wdi the architectural room finiish schedule. C. Provide all necessary track hardware. fittings, connectors, pendant feeds, end caps, etc. for complete track righting systems. D. Provide all necessary low voltage transformers, connectors, mounting clamps, etc. for complete low voltage righting systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Where luminaires am indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on 1 -1/2 -inch ceiling spacer% unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiring material. 3.02 STANDARD DRYWALL FRAMES A. Provide aluminum drywall frames for all recessed luminaires installed in inaccessible ceilings unless otherwise approved by the Architect. Provide drywall frame designed and fabricated of such material to preclude the possibility of rust staining drywall. 3.03 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Property support and align luminaires and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the luminaires. Coordinate complete luminaire installation With the building construction. Clean and lamp all lurnimaires With new lamps immediately prior to final inspedion. B. Provide all required nisrric bracing for luminaires utirized on projects located in seismiii; zones. C. Square and rectangular luminaires shall be mounted With sides parallel to building lines. and parallel with ceiling lines. D. Install fluorescent lurniinaires as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal arignment, preventing horizontal or verUcal deflection or angular jointing of luminaires suspended in continuous rows. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaire Wes and accessories prior to ordering luminaires. Coordinate and cooperate With ceiling supplier in the preparation of ceMing shop drawings. B. Verify thickness of ceiling systems and provide extensimns as required for all downlights. C. Verify luminaim dimensions and coordinate with the available wall and/or ceiring space prior to ordering. END OF SM= 16= PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in SecUon 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, *General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contruct fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all control equipment to be used on this project. In these portfolios use manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by equipment name. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCKS A. Digital Tirneclocks 1. As indicated on the draviiings. Provide digital 7 -day timeclock with LCD display. 99 set points per week, manual override, autornatic daylight savings adjustment automatic leap year compensation, permanent schedule retention, and power outage backup. Provide Tork DW series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songarno and Intermatic are equally acceptable. B. Electromechancial Timedocks 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide electromechanical 7 -day timeclock, capable of a different program each day of the week. Provide contacts rated 40 amps per pole, voltage indicated on the drawings, and reserve power supply. Provide Tork W series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songamo and Intermatic are equally acceptable. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Electrically Held 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide Square 'D' Ckiss 8903, Type L fighting contoctor. Equivalent contactors manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, and Eabn/Cutler-Hammer am equally acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance With manufacturees instructions. B. Install individual controls, contoctors, relays and time -delay relays in enclosures dimctly adjacent to the ponelboard serving the circuits controlled. C. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 16300. D. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. E Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays and controls as required to switch the bads in the manner indicated on the drawings whether such independent components are specifically indicated or not. F. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supMy and inform Engineer of arry deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. END OF SEM 1I%V PARTI GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outrined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The Contractor shall fumish all labor and material necessary for the proper installation and testing of the fire alarm system for this building. The fire alarm system shall be connected to the smoke detectors, audio/visual indicators and the smoke detectors in the return ductwork of the rooftop units. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the current NFPA Standards 72, the local Fire Code, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall bear the Underwriteri' LabomWw label and be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) aft receiving approval from the local Fire Marshal. Submit all information required for Man review and permitting by authorities having jurisifliction, inducting but not rimited to equipment cut sheets, floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Equipment: Shall be of the some manufacturer as the exiiiting system and fully compatible with the existing system. B. Fire Alarm Equipment- Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design producL products of the following are acceptable: 1. Gamewell-FCI 2. Fire -Lite Alarms 3. Notifier 4. Silent Knight 5. Siemens Building Technologies. Inc. 6. SimplexGrinnell 8. Substitutions: The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications and all requirements of the project as listed or shown on the drawings. The contractor accepts all responsilmlity for costs and coordination Issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. C. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances 1. Provide inlitiating devices made the same manufacturer as the control unils. I Provide all notfficatkin appriances made by the some manufacturer. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: 1. Provide all components necessary for jurisdictional approval, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises. Entire building area(s) as indicated on the drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict order of precedence of requirements is as listed. Always comply with the most stringent requimment of each of the following: a. The Americans With DisaWilies Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshall. c. The requirements of the'local authority having jurisdiction. d. Apprmble local codes. e. NFPA 72; where the word *shoukl! is used, consideir that provision mandatory, where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. f. The contruct documents (drawings and specifications) unless those documents exceed the requirements listed in the above standards, in which case the contract documents shall take precederim 4. Evacuation Alarm: Single or Multiple smoke zones; allow for evomation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. Program zones as indicated on the drawings, subject to the approval of the local rim Marshall. 5. Voice Notification: Where indicated with speaker symbology or if required by code, provide emergency voice alarm communications With multichannel capability, (roal. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone untess otherwise indicated, with alarm notifution in the alarm zone and other adjacent zones as ifictated by the authority having jurisdiction. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by the local Fire Marshall. 8. Hearing Impaired Occupants. Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units. 9. Combined Systernin Do not combine fire alarm system With other non -fire systems. j B. Superviding Stations and Fire, Department Connections: 1. bdsUng to remain. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class % Slyle A. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources-. 1. Existing to remain. 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance With NFPA 72. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance With NFPA 72. D. WAC 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers as incfioated; shut down air moving fans on all units rated 2,000 ch or greater or as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 CONVENTIONAL CONTROL PANELS A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall -mounted enclosure. 8. Power supply. Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciatom door holders, smoke dampers, and relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supMy With capacity for operating systern in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 rninutes. C. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. D. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. E. Indicating Appliance Circuits. Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. F. Municipal Trip Circuit- Output connections for remote station transmitter. Include muniicipol trip DISCONNECT switch. G. Remote Station Signal Transmitter Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone rines to central station receiver. H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified. 1. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, arid ALARM SILENCE switch. J. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuid trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visual and audliAe trouble alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel. 3. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station. 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is crisplayed until initialing failure or circuit trouble is cleared. K. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Sound arid display local fire alarm signalling devices with signal. 2. Transmit zone -coded signal to remote station equipment 3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel, when present. 4. Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system, when present. 5. Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main floor or afterriate floor, when present 6. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and smoke damper operation, when present 7. Transmit signal to release door hold -open devices by zone, when present L Alarm Reset* System remains in alarm mode until manually reset With key-accesmble reset function; system resets only N initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. M. Lamp Test Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. N. Drift Sequence of Operation: Manual drift function causes alarm mode operation as described. 2.05 INUATING DEVICES A. Ceiling or Wall Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, and auxiliary relay contact suitable for mounting on 4 inch (102 mm) outlet box. Provide two -mire or four -wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits. B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual irxr=Uon of detecW actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide four -Wire detector with separate power supMy and signal circuits. Include remote test/reset station for each duct mounted smoke detector, including audible and visible alarm indication and reset capability. 2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Alarm Lights. NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flusher with red lettered "FIRE! on clear lens. B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 7Z flush type fire alarm horn. 1. Sound Ruling: 8`7 dB at 10 feet (3M). 2. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher. 2.07 FIRE ALARM CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit 1. Install conduit in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 2. Install all concealed, inaccessible wiring in a conduit or raceway. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or raceway. Conduit nil shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross sectional area where three or more cabin am included within a single conduiL Plenum rated cable may be used only where concealed above accessible tile ceilings or accessible shafts. 3. Separate cables from ary open conductors of Class I circuds and do not Mace in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing Ckiss 1 cables. 4. Wiring for low voltage control, alarm notification, emergency communication, and sikfillar power -limited auxiliary functions may be installed in the some conduit as initiating and signaring One circuits. Design system to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the control panel or any other component provided except where entry is specified by the manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum. B. Wire 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall comply with local, state, and national codes and as recommended by the manufacturer. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall be not less than 18 AWG for initiating device and signaling kne circuits, and 14 AWG for noltification appriance circuits. 3. All wiring and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. All field wiring shall be supervised for open eircuids, short circuits, and grounded condition C. Non -Conduit Plenum Rated Vim 1. Where permitted by local codes and authodUes, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, inducting wiring installed IrWide walls. 2. Inilkting Device and Indioating Appliance Circuits: Power rimited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor� 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handring ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. D. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits. Building Wire as specified in Section 16100. E Control Panel: Connected to a separate dedicated branch cimuit with a separate dedicated disconnect switch; circuit labeled FIRE AM. F. FIRE AM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE 1. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors With insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 2. Match existing fire alarm Wire color cocring N present If no coding system exists use the following coding system: 3. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, blue, while, green. 4. Initiating Device Circuit Black, red. 5. Detector Power Supply. Violet brown. 6. Signal Device Circuit Blue (positive), white (negative). 7. Door Hokler/Release: Gray, gray. B. Cirouit Conductors. Copper or optical fiber, provide 200 feet (60 m) extra; color code and label. G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 83 combination waveform arid NFPA 70, except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line -to -neutral, and &90 V(ac), fine -to -line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to Protect applicable equipment for 24 V(dc) maximum do clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line -to -ground, and 72 V(dc), rine-to-line. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building, rated to protect applicable equipment. H. Locks and Keys: Deriver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the some standard lock and key for each key operated switch and locliable panel and caVinet; provide 5 keys of each type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finislied areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. E. Install products in accordance With manufacturees instructions. F. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Install Wiring in conduit except as provided for accessible concealed areas. G. Where permitted by local codes and authorities, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All Wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, including Wiring installed inside walls. All Wiring installed where exposed to view shall be in conduit. H. Mount end -of -rine device in box with lost device or separate box adjacent to last device in drait. 1. Mount outlet box for electric door holder/release to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. J. Make conduit and Wiring connections to door holder/release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper swiftches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors as applicable. K. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. NoUfy authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheiluling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person With equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct perform preriminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and suppries required to accomplish inspection and testing. F Perform inspection and testing in accordance With NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work. adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire systern complies with contract documents. H. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days Without ary system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over aft correction of malfunction. I At end of successful crognostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Farm! 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maiintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output miatrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined With inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieM until inspection and testing is successful and: I. Specified diagnosUc period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. . Final acceptance of the fire alarm systern has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy pernifl: has been granted. 7. Specified pre-doseout instruction is complete. C. Perform post -occupancy instruction withiin I month after date of occupancy. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid for later acceptance, for a maintenance contract for 2 years, to include the work described below, include the total cost of contract proposal to be valk! at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having juriscrction. C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner 1. Provide on-site response Within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner Will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time, include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contruct. D. Provide a complete description of preventive momtenance, systematic examimation, adjustment cleaning, inspection, and testing, With a detailed schedule. E Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nattim of the trouble, correction performed, and parts repkiced. Subrnit duplicate of each log entry to Ownees representative upon completion of site visit. F. Comply With Owner's requirements for access to facilly and security. 1*11111`&M PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16DOO, "General Provisicim" form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Although such work is not specifically incricated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKWARDS A. Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick, UL -labeled fire - retardant, size as indicated on the drawings. Do not point over UL label. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius. 1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep With single gang plaster ring. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. Conduit- As specified in Section 16100. Provide pull cords in all conduit. Use 3/4 inch conduit minimum. B. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC -40 conduit. Use ekDnded- sweep bends as necessary to accommodate the serving utiliVs REVIEWED requirements and to permit the installation of cables inducting any necessary heads and terminations where applicable. COMPLIANCI NFPA 70 -1 PAI?T 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BACKWARDS JAN 2 A. Provide 6 AWG grounding conductor to the power system's grounding electrode systern. iV of Tukl 3.02 PATHWAYS BUILDING DIN A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade. Encase in at least 3 inch thick concrete for ot least 60 inches out from the building rine. B. Install With the folloveing minimum clearances: 1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters. transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power system. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and ponelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit RECEIVED 1. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a siinfilITY OF TUMILP horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially i installed. DEC 2 9 2016 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceifings, and floors except where specifically incricated to be exposed. PERFAIT CENTER a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as I exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel With or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structurol members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder. Seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70. E Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penistrations through fire - rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 160DO. WA ECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 30 )0 00 W-1-017 . -0 � .00 i ori a rl- i 0 0 00 L 0 r 0 0 00 00 Ir - 00 (3) Z 0 0 Z :D r) rr W rl Z CC C/) Ir - LO CY) DEC.20.201 BY:SM JOB:#16.02 120/208V 120/240V 277/48W Phase A Block Block Brown Phase B Red Orange Yellow phase C Blue Blue Purple Neutral Wits White Grey Equipment Ground Green Green Green C. Colored non -aging, plastic tape may be used to color feeder conductors. Color code all control wire insulation and tog at each sprice and termination. PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this secUon of the work are specified in Section 16000, *General Provisions.0 The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The electrical service to the building is as indicated on the drawings. 1.03 GROUNDING A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' B. Ground the electrical system completely and effectively, as required by the National Electrical Code and as specified hereinafter. C. Provide all ground systems and make connections mechanically secure and electrically continuous. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EIECTRICAL SEINCE A. Arrange With the servicing utilities and pay all costs and fees for services indicated on the drawings. All work shall be in accordance With serving company's standards and subject to their approval. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Raceways: Install metallic raceways mechaniedly and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment Bond all metallic raceways together, with a ground conjuctor, and connect to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide separate green equipment grounding conductor for all electrical raceways, to effectively ground all panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior righting standards, and non-current carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, busses, etc., for this purpom Connect the equipment ground to the buViing system ground. Use the some size equipment grounifing conductors as phase conductors, up through 8 AWG. See drawings for conductor size with phase conductors 6 AWG and larger. C. Receptacles: Permanently connect the ground tertnimal on each receptacle to the green ground conductor. D. Ductwork: Provide a fleodble ground drop, 6 AWG equivalent at each flexible duct connection at each air handier, exhaust fan, and supply fan, and install to preclude vibration. E Motors. Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a baked soldedess lug. Botts, screws and washers shall be bronze or cadmium Mated steel. 3.03 TESTS A. Provide the tests as outrined hereinafter and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each system. 3.04 FINAL TESTS A. Start final tests after the work described in these specifications has been completely installed in accordance with the true spirit and intent of these specifications and after complete preliminary tests have been made which indicate adequacy, quality, completion and satisfactory operation. These final tests am comprised of the following: 1. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each panelboard and switchboard in the project. Where the equipment manufacturer includes an Electrical Test Report With the equipment the manufacturer's report outline shall be used. 2. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each motor 1/2 horsepower and larger. Where the equipment manufacturer includes a Motor Test Report With the equipment, the monufacturer's report outrine shall be used. B. The Contractor shall submit the above completed 'Reportso to the Architect in dupficate, noUng all deviations from requirements limted below. 1. Plus or minus 5 percent nominal system voltage and no-load voltage, or a plus or minus 5 percent between no bad and full bad voltage. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent variation between rated and actual motor current. 3. Plus or mimus 10 percent variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents. The Contractor shall balance phase currents of all distributbri equipment, wiWin the tolerances mentioned above. 4. Insulation resistance between conductors and ground less than 1,000,000 ohms, unless permirtled by NEC. 3.05 FINAL CORRECTIONS A. Correct promptly arry failure or defects revealed by these tests as determined by the Architect. Reconduct tests on these corrected items as directed by the ArchilecL EW OF SIMMI 1=0 SEM I REMIM DIS11111IRM SVSFFH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PANEWDS, CABINETS AND SAFETY SWITCHES A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions! The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 160DO, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extiint required by the references thereto. B. Provide all panel boards and cabinets inducring breakers, bus bars, hinged door, lock trim, and all appurtenances for a complete and satisfactory instalkition. C. Provide all fused switches and non-fused safety switches for circtil: protection and disconnect proposes. D. Square 'D' equipment is mentioned herein to establish quality and general requirements. Comparable equipment manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, or Eaton/Cutler-Hammer may be submitted for approval during shop drawing period. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. WiWin thirty days after award of contract furnish the architect five shop drawiing portfolios (bound caries) containiing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all distribution equipment to be used on this project. In these portforicis use manufacturer's specification sheets, Identified by equipment name, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picture, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Voltages. 3. Ampacitles. 4. Fault current ratings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANE1BOARDS (24W CLASS) A. Provide Square 'D` Comparry Type NOOD dead front panelboard With bolt - on circuit breakers. Provide minimum box dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5 3/4 inches deep. Provide minimum 5 inch top and bottom gutter, not including ground bus space, and 6 inch minimum side gutters. All pointed parts shall be pointed with the manufacturer's standard color baked enamel over a phosphate pretreated surface. Rate panelboord for a minimum of 10,000 amps, symmetrical interrupting capacity. B. Provide 100% capacity aluminum or copper phase busses and neutral bus. Provide 100% capacity copper ground bus. C. Provide copper insulated isolated ground bus for ponelboords serving isolated ground loads. D. Provide zinc -coated sheet steel cabinet conforrWing to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. Except when boated outdoors, provide NEMA 1 enclosure. I- Provide trims with adjustable trim clamps. FA trims With hinged doors having combination, lock and latch. Provide hardware on flush doors and trims, with all beads or similar projections on the inside. When installed, the trim arid door must present a smooth, flush appearance. Provide disc tumbler locks, all keyed alike. F. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic cover and metal frame on the inside of each door. Mount a typewrittm directory, properly identifying each eircuit, under the dear plastic cover. G. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background dearly indicating the name of the panelboard. H. Provide split -bus, sub -feed lugs, feed -through lugs, sub -feed protectivii devices and contadom, if any, as indicated on the drawings or specified in this or other sections of these specifications. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide for panelboard use, molded plastic case, air circuit breakers conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-375. B. Provide breakers with thiernrid magnetic trip units, and a common trip bar for two- or three -pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip oil poles of each breaker. C. Pro" breakers of the trip-fme and trip -indicating boft-on type, with quick -make, quick -break contacts. Provide single two- or thme- pole breaker interchangeability. D. Provide interchangeable rating Mugs/trip units for circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger. E Provide solid-state molded case circuit breakers with electronic writing, timmg and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings for circuit breakers with frame sizes 1200 amperes and larger. Provide adjustable current settings for ground fault trip and instantaneous trip, adjustable pickup, and ground fault sensing integral With circuit breaker. F. Provide RACR rated circuit breakers for circuit breakers that serve heating, ventilation or &-conditioning equipment. G. Provide shunt trip cogs where required. H. Provide Class A ground fault circuit interrupting type circuit breakers where required. 1. In jurisdictioris that have adopted the 2008 (or subsequent) version of the National Electrical Code, provide handle ties for all single pole circuit breakers that serve circuits comprising a mulllwire branch circuit to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors in the multiwire branch circuit. J. Tandem or buff -sized circuit breakers am not permitted. 2.03 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide NEMA Type HD safety switches With quick -make, quick -break mechanism. 'Bonderize or approved equal, prime and finlish all enclosures to resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance. Intedock cover with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the 'offo position. NEMA 1 enclosure is standard except as noted or required. Provide NEMA 31? enclosures for sviitches exposed to the weather except where noted otherwise. B. Provide appropriate fuse crips for safety switches that am incricated to be fused. C. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background clearly indicating the name of the load served. 2.04 FUSES A. For mains and feeders rated at 600 amps or less, provide Bussmann current rimiting time delay Class RKI fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RMS. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferruz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the same manufacturer. B. For maiins and feeders rated at more than 600 amps, provide Bussmann Class L time delay fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RM& Equivalent fuses manufactured by Litteffuse or Fwaz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. C. For motor protection, provide Bussmiann Class RKI time delay or Class L time delay fuses. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferraz Shawmut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. 2.05 AUXILIARY SYSTEM CABINETS A. Provide zinc -coated sheet "I cabinet conforming to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. . Provide a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturers standard color on trim and doors. Except where specified otherwise, provide NEMA I enclosure. B. Provide cabinets With interior dimensions not less than those inifficated on the drawings. Each trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush catch. Provide flush hardware on all flush doors and trims With all beads or similar projections, on the inside. When installed, the trim and door must present a smooth. flush appearance. C. Size doors to provide maximum size openings to the box interiom Provide boxes With a 3/4 inch weatherproof grade plywood buckboard having a two -coat insulating varnish finish, for telephone termination and where shown. Coordinate size with Telephone Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORT A. Property align distribution equipment and adequately support independent of the connecting raceways. Provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the support of the equipment. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Where distribution equipment is installed during construction, Mace temporary covers over the openings at all times, except when work is Wing performed therein. 3.03 INSULATION A. Where distribution equipment is flush mounted in an outside wall. insulate the back and am of cabinet With 1/2 inch rigiid fiberglass insulation. 3.04 FUSES A. Provide fuses at all locations shown on the drawings or required for supplemental protection. B. Deriver to the Owner at the time of final inspection, one spare set of 3 fuses for each type, size and voltage installed. C. Provide instruction label for all fuses installed, indicating fuse type, size and description. 3.05 PHASE BALANCE A. Balance all phase loads to Within 10 percent END OF SEEM 10300 PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisiion&" The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Ptovisions,' form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The luminaim catalog numbers listed on the drawling indicate manufacturer, lumimaire design, appearance, etc., desired. These lueindires shall be modified, if necessary, to comMy with the subsequent specification. C. Provide, complete in all respects, all luminaires shown on the drawiings. Where 8 foot lurnimaires are shown on the drawings and a 4 foot lurninaire scheduled, furnish tandem 4 foot luminaires or two 4 foot individual units. Luminaires specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of luminaires of other manufacturers. The sole and final judgment of substitutions lies With the Architect. D. All luminaires must bear the Underwriters Laboratories label. E All luminaire component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages. The shipment from the luminaire manufacturer shall include integrally mounted and/or remote mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the luminaire lamps. F. If luminaires specified herein are discontinued after the contract for the work is executed, provide suitable substitute luminaires, Without additional cost as directed by the ArchitecL G. Accept all responsibility for coordination of substituted luminaires with the balance of the building construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contract fumish the architect five shop drawling portforms (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and candlepower distribution curves of all luminaires to be used on this project. In these portfolios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on lumindire schedule, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picittim, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Coefficients of utilirzation by an approved testing laboratory. 3. Candlepower distribution by an approved testing laboratory. 4. Lumindire brightness by an approved testing laboratory. 5. Fusing and type of ballast provided. 6. Certification of plastic materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires 1. Lumindires shall be constructed of steel, rust protected With a five -stage metal prefinishing process, and finished with baked white enamel of the acrylic base or alkyd base type. The entire luminaire shall be finished in this manner except where non- fermus reflecting surfaces or louvem are specified. 2. Luminaires shall be designed for maximum heat dissipation so that under operating conditions of a 90 degrees F. ambient raw temperature, the ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 3. Reflector glass shall be 30 percent minimum measured in accordance with ASTM Method D -523-53T (60 degrees). 4. Provide a reflectance of 85 percent rnmimum on all surfaces measured with an integrating sphere -type reffectometer. 5. Where the luminaires specified require the use of plastic lenses, materials of the highest quarAy conforming to the following requirements: a. Use 100 percent virgin acryllic thermoplastic. b. All raw material used must be of a quality to exceed IES -SPI - NEVA specifications by at least 100 percent This will permit a maximum of 3 units of yellowling factor with 2,000 hours of exposure in a fade -o -meter. The lumindire manufacturer shall fumish a guarantee that 3 units of yellowing will not be exceeded after 15 years of luminuire use, on a 10 -hour day, 7 -day week basis. B. Ballasts 1. Ballasts shall be Motorola Electronic ballasts, or approved equal. Ballasts shall be rapid start and operate at a frequency of 25 KHz, or higher. Ballasts shall have a minimum power factor of .99 and shall not exceed 10% THD. Balkists shall bear the UL label, Class P. 2. Ballasts shall be securely mounted Within luminaires to eliminate vitirution noise and to provide adequate heat transfer. 3. Ballosts operaUng 4,30 mliliamp lamps shall have a sound rating of W. C. Emergency Ballasts I. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a Wininum of 1100 lumens and capable of supporting two kimps. 2. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing compact D. Lamps fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a rifinimum of 950 lumens. 1. Provide energy saving 78 'Octron* lamps as manufactured by Sylvaniia and as scheduled on the drawings. TWirly-two wait mod start 4100 degree lamps shall have an initial rating of 2900 lumens. 2. Fumish all fluorescent lamps mode by the some lamp manufacturer in order to match color phosphors. 3. Provide low mercury content type fluorescent lamps. 4. *Bum -in' all fluorescent lamps controlled by dimmers for a Winimurn of 100 hours prior to placing in dimmed luminaire. 2.02 INCANDESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Lumindires- Provide incandescent luminaires that hove been designed for a maximum temperature of 90 degrees C at the point of contact With the ceiling. B. Lamps: Provide 120 volt lamps, unless noted otherviiise, conforming to Federal Specification WL -101. Provide frosted or clear bulb, shape (A19, A23, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories including drywall frames. sterns, canoiMes, cords, toggle bofts, etc., necessary to mount the luminaire in a proper and approved method. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware, trim rings, etc. for the type of ceiling specified. Coordinate Wdi the architectural room finiish schedule. C. Provide all necessary track hardware. fittings, connectors, pendant feeds, end caps, etc. for complete track righting systems. D. Provide all necessary low voltage transformers, connectors, mounting clamps, etc. for complete low voltage righting systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Where luminaires am indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on 1 -1/2 -inch ceiling spacer% unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiring material. 3.02 STANDARD DRYWALL FRAMES A. Provide aluminum drywall frames for all recessed luminaires installed in inaccessible ceilings unless otherwise approved by the Architect. Provide drywall frame designed and fabricated of such material to preclude the possibility of rust staining drywall. 3.03 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Property support and align luminaires and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the luminaires. Coordinate complete luminaire installation With the building construction. Clean and lamp all lurnimaires With new lamps immediately prior to final inspedion. B. Provide all required nisrric bracing for luminaires utirized on projects located in seismiii; zones. C. Square and rectangular luminaires shall be mounted With sides parallel to building lines. and parallel with ceiling lines. D. Install fluorescent lurniinaires as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal arignment, preventing horizontal or verUcal deflection or angular jointing of luminaires suspended in continuous rows. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaire Wes and accessories prior to ordering luminaires. Coordinate and cooperate With ceiling supplier in the preparation of ceMing shop drawings. B. Verify thickness of ceiling systems and provide extensimns as required for all downlights. C. Verify luminaim dimensions and coordinate with the available wall and/or ceiring space prior to ordering. END OF SM= 16= PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in SecUon 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, *General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contruct fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all control equipment to be used on this project. In these portfolios use manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by equipment name. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCKS A. Digital Tirneclocks 1. As indicated on the draviiings. Provide digital 7 -day timeclock with LCD display. 99 set points per week, manual override, autornatic daylight savings adjustment automatic leap year compensation, permanent schedule retention, and power outage backup. Provide Tork DW series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songarno and Intermatic are equally acceptable. B. Electromechancial Timedocks 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide electromechanical 7 -day timeclock, capable of a different program each day of the week. Provide contacts rated 40 amps per pole, voltage indicated on the drawings, and reserve power supply. Provide Tork W series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songamo and Intermatic are equally acceptable. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Electrically Held 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide Square 'D' Ckiss 8903, Type L fighting contoctor. Equivalent contactors manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, and Eabn/Cutler-Hammer am equally acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance With manufacturees instructions. B. Install individual controls, contoctors, relays and time -delay relays in enclosures dimctly adjacent to the ponelboard serving the circuits controlled. C. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 16300. D. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. E Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays and controls as required to switch the bads in the manner indicated on the drawings whether such independent components are specifically indicated or not. F. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supMy and inform Engineer of arry deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. END OF SEM 1I%V PARTI GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outrined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The Contractor shall fumish all labor and material necessary for the proper installation and testing of the fire alarm system for this building. The fire alarm system shall be connected to the smoke detectors, audio/visual indicators and the smoke detectors in the return ductwork of the rooftop units. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the current NFPA Standards 72, the local Fire Code, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall bear the Underwriteri' LabomWw label and be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) aft receiving approval from the local Fire Marshal. Submit all information required for Man review and permitting by authorities having jurisifliction, inducting but not rimited to equipment cut sheets, floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Equipment: Shall be of the some manufacturer as the exiiiting system and fully compatible with the existing system. B. Fire Alarm Equipment- Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design producL products of the following are acceptable: 1. Gamewell-FCI 2. Fire -Lite Alarms 3. Notifier 4. Silent Knight 5. Siemens Building Technologies. Inc. 6. SimplexGrinnell 8. Substitutions: The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications and all requirements of the project as listed or shown on the drawings. The contractor accepts all responsilmlity for costs and coordination Issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. C. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances 1. Provide inlitiating devices made the same manufacturer as the control unils. I Provide all notfficatkin appriances made by the some manufacturer. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: 1. Provide all components necessary for jurisdictional approval, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises. Entire building area(s) as indicated on the drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict order of precedence of requirements is as listed. Always comply with the most stringent requimment of each of the following: a. The Americans With DisaWilies Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshall. c. The requirements of the'local authority having jurisdiction. d. Apprmble local codes. e. NFPA 72; where the word *shoukl! is used, consideir that provision mandatory, where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. f. The contruct documents (drawings and specifications) unless those documents exceed the requirements listed in the above standards, in which case the contract documents shall take precederim 4. Evacuation Alarm: Single or Multiple smoke zones; allow for evomation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. Program zones as indicated on the drawings, subject to the approval of the local rim Marshall. 5. Voice Notification: Where indicated with speaker symbology or if required by code, provide emergency voice alarm communications With multichannel capability, (roal. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone untess otherwise indicated, with alarm notifution in the alarm zone and other adjacent zones as ifictated by the authority having jurisdiction. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by the local Fire Marshall. 8. Hearing Impaired Occupants. Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units. 9. Combined Systernin Do not combine fire alarm system With other non -fire systems. j B. Superviding Stations and Fire, Department Connections: 1. bdsUng to remain. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class % Slyle A. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources-. 1. Existing to remain. 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance With NFPA 72. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance With NFPA 72. D. WAC 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers as incfioated; shut down air moving fans on all units rated 2,000 ch or greater or as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 CONVENTIONAL CONTROL PANELS A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall -mounted enclosure. 8. Power supply. Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciatom door holders, smoke dampers, and relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supMy With capacity for operating systern in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 rninutes. C. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. D. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. E. Indicating Appliance Circuits. Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. F. Municipal Trip Circuit- Output connections for remote station transmitter. Include muniicipol trip DISCONNECT switch. G. Remote Station Signal Transmitter Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone rines to central station receiver. H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified. 1. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, arid ALARM SILENCE switch. J. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuid trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visual and audliAe trouble alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel. 3. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station. 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is crisplayed until initialing failure or circuit trouble is cleared. K. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Sound arid display local fire alarm signalling devices with signal. 2. Transmit zone -coded signal to remote station equipment 3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel, when present. 4. Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system, when present. 5. Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main floor or afterriate floor, when present 6. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and smoke damper operation, when present 7. Transmit signal to release door hold -open devices by zone, when present L Alarm Reset* System remains in alarm mode until manually reset With key-accesmble reset function; system resets only N initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. M. Lamp Test Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. N. Drift Sequence of Operation: Manual drift function causes alarm mode operation as described. 2.05 INUATING DEVICES A. Ceiling or Wall Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, and auxiliary relay contact suitable for mounting on 4 inch (102 mm) outlet box. Provide two -mire or four -wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits. B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual irxr=Uon of detecW actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide four -Wire detector with separate power supMy and signal circuits. Include remote test/reset station for each duct mounted smoke detector, including audible and visible alarm indication and reset capability. 2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Alarm Lights. NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flusher with red lettered "FIRE! on clear lens. B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 7Z flush type fire alarm horn. 1. Sound Ruling: 8`7 dB at 10 feet (3M). 2. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher. 2.07 FIRE ALARM CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit 1. Install conduit in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 2. Install all concealed, inaccessible wiring in a conduit or raceway. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or raceway. Conduit nil shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross sectional area where three or more cabin am included within a single conduiL Plenum rated cable may be used only where concealed above accessible tile ceilings or accessible shafts. 3. Separate cables from ary open conductors of Class I circuds and do not Mace in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing Ckiss 1 cables. 4. Wiring for low voltage control, alarm notification, emergency communication, and sikfillar power -limited auxiliary functions may be installed in the some conduit as initiating and signaring One circuits. Design system to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the control panel or any other component provided except where entry is specified by the manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum. B. Wire 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall comply with local, state, and national codes and as recommended by the manufacturer. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall be not less than 18 AWG for initiating device and signaling kne circuits, and 14 AWG for noltification appriance circuits. 3. All wiring and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. All field wiring shall be supervised for open eircuids, short circuits, and grounded condition C. Non -Conduit Plenum Rated Vim 1. Where permitted by local codes and authodUes, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, inducting wiring installed IrWide walls. 2. Inilkting Device and Indioating Appliance Circuits: Power rimited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor� 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handring ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. D. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits. Building Wire as specified in Section 16100. E Control Panel: Connected to a separate dedicated branch cimuit with a separate dedicated disconnect switch; circuit labeled FIRE AM. F. FIRE AM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE 1. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors With insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 2. Match existing fire alarm Wire color cocring N present If no coding system exists use the following coding system: 3. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, blue, while, green. 4. Initiating Device Circuit Black, red. 5. Detector Power Supply. Violet brown. 6. Signal Device Circuit Blue (positive), white (negative). 7. Door Hokler/Release: Gray, gray. B. Cirouit Conductors. Copper or optical fiber, provide 200 feet (60 m) extra; color code and label. G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 83 combination waveform arid NFPA 70, except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line -to -neutral, and &90 V(ac), fine -to -line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to Protect applicable equipment for 24 V(dc) maximum do clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line -to -ground, and 72 V(dc), rine-to-line. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building, rated to protect applicable equipment. H. Locks and Keys: Deriver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the some standard lock and key for each key operated switch and locliable panel and caVinet; provide 5 keys of each type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finislied areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. E. Install products in accordance With manufacturees instructions. F. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Install Wiring in conduit except as provided for accessible concealed areas. G. Where permitted by local codes and authorities, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All Wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, including Wiring installed inside walls. All Wiring installed where exposed to view shall be in conduit. H. Mount end -of -rine device in box with lost device or separate box adjacent to last device in drait. 1. Mount outlet box for electric door holder/release to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. J. Make conduit and Wiring connections to door holder/release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper swiftches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors as applicable. K. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. NoUfy authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheiluling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person With equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct perform preriminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and suppries required to accomplish inspection and testing. F Perform inspection and testing in accordance With NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work. adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire systern complies with contract documents. H. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days Without ary system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over aft correction of malfunction. I At end of successful crognostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Farm! 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maiintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output miatrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined With inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieM until inspection and testing is successful and: I. Specified diagnosUc period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. . Final acceptance of the fire alarm systern has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy pernifl: has been granted. 7. Specified pre-doseout instruction is complete. C. Perform post -occupancy instruction withiin I month after date of occupancy. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid for later acceptance, for a maintenance contract for 2 years, to include the work described below, include the total cost of contract proposal to be valk! at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having juriscrction. C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner 1. Provide on-site response Within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner Will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time, include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contruct. D. Provide a complete description of preventive momtenance, systematic examimation, adjustment cleaning, inspection, and testing, With a detailed schedule. E Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nattim of the trouble, correction performed, and parts repkiced. Subrnit duplicate of each log entry to Ownees representative upon completion of site visit. F. Comply With Owner's requirements for access to facilly and security. 1*11111`&M PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16DOO, "General Provisicim" form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Although such work is not specifically incricated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKWARDS A. Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick, UL -labeled fire - retardant, size as indicated on the drawings. Do not point over UL label. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius. 1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep With single gang plaster ring. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. Conduit- As specified in Section 16100. Provide pull cords in all conduit. Use 3/4 inch conduit minimum. B. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC -40 conduit. Use ekDnded- sweep bends as necessary to accommodate the serving utiliVs REVIEWED requirements and to permit the installation of cables inducting any necessary heads and terminations where applicable. COMPLIANCI NFPA 70 -1 PAI?T 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BACKWARDS JAN 2 A. Provide 6 AWG grounding conductor to the power system's grounding electrode systern. iV of Tukl 3.02 PATHWAYS BUILDING DIN A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade. Encase in at least 3 inch thick concrete for ot least 60 inches out from the building rine. B. Install With the folloveing minimum clearances: 1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters. transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power system. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and ponelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit RECEIVED 1. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a siinfilITY OF TUMILP horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially i installed. DEC 2 9 2016 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceifings, and floors except where specifically incricated to be exposed. PERFAIT CENTER a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as I exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel With or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structurol members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder. Seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70. E Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penistrations through fire - rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 160DO. WA ECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 30 )0 00 W-1-017 . -0 � .00 i ori a rl- i 0 0 00 L 0 r 0 0 00 00 Ir - 00 (3) Z 0 0 Z :D r) rr W rl Z CC C/) Ir - LO CY) DEC.20.201 BY:SM JOB:#16.02 E NOTE 1 \ ii9 011 A 33 +i/ X 33 033 '� � I O9 9 ®9 9 O 033 A C S 125 125 3 3 09 C A 33 STUDIO 127 _127 11 3 033 A O 3 ENTRY LL�� 154 33 0 O 1 STUDIO 28 ---L 8 T9(D 1 C 7 X® 7 o _o_ STUDI 29 1 -1 L i 124 Q 3 0 3 LSTUD30 B 1 O 1 3 O STUDIO 26 3 126 O 3 STB31 131 3 0 O7 O9 O 3 STU 1 10 20 1 bn B 3 033 033 09 Q33 o61+ 0.1 LS �(:��UDIO 3 121 B 112311 3 3 O O 3 3 0 3 B- UDIO 133 3 O7 0 5 STUDIO 18 O118 O 5 5 33 033 A 031 A O9 TUDIO 7 19 B N 1 11 R 117 21 21 0 O 21 21 3 3 11.1 O —STUDIO 35 3 135 J �tfs oS ENTRY 155 07� O 7 B 3 LST DIO 13 137 B 3C 7 0 A 7 3 7 9 7 0 0 0 X _S:L! 32 STUDIO 36 B 1 136 O o B 0 0 1 1 21 0 21 STU 9 I 1 21 21 O 5 T1 TUDI 13 5 C 31 31 CO O 031 A 1i 1-1 21 0 21 O 21 ISXNDIO 4 140 21 1 E4 LIGHTING PLAN 9 21 21 0 21 C UDIO _B_ 102 21 0 7 9 0 0 O STUDI 1 101 1 O O 5 5 ST 12 T ^STU 1011 B �11 5 5 Ll–s 9 31 X 31 0 O 090 31 Q31 031 A C 31 O 21 031 O A 21 STUDIO 101 0 (pi 31 21 09 A 1/4 $I= i '-0" O7 9� 31 O C_ C��2RIDOR 143 031 A 311 O5 NOTE 2 5 OS O WOM NS 147 05 A — — — K P9 031 STIBULE A 145 O5 �5 f os O5 �� TE 2 0 5 O 5 r B L STU 107 5 g0 5 A CORRIDOR O -- 144 / 05 os, O C STU STUDIO 10 7 104 1 7 O O 5 1 0 STUDIO 2 O 104 1 1 O 0 1 1 IL GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES., A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD CONDI TIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELFWITHTHE WORKPRIORTO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVEFIRSTSALVAGERIGHTSONALL MATERIALSANO EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BEING REMOVED. F. TIE EXI T SIGNS, FROG EYES AND NIGHT L IGHTS INTO THE LIGHTING CIRCUITAHEAD OF SWITCHES. G. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE CIRCUIT POSITION. H. CIRCUI TS REFER TO PANEL "A ", UNLESS INDICA TED OTHERWISE. LIGHTING NOTES. - 1. OVERRIDE SWITCH, SEEDETAIL 1/E3.1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. CEILINGMOUNTED OCCUPANCYSENSOR . 3. PROVIDEA 1000 WATT L UTRON DIVA DIMMER, COLOR TO MA TCHLIGHT SWITCHESAND RECEPTACLES. Permit wo. D-1 C0 Pian review approv l is sub!ect to errors and Omissions. Approval of consiruciien d04--UIfl011tS does not rauIhoriza the violation of any a opted code or ordina Seco ;yt of a rovo �j PP �yan c n - ns a c,rz By: Date: City of TukvWla BUILDING DIVISION No changes shall FO to the scope of VJor€t without prior approval of TBuilding Division. MOTE: RICvi740113 c ill require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. �SE�'��, PLRMIT REQUIRED FOR: C14 chanied 0 Qectrioai PrasPlplM Ing City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED .FOR COMPLIANCE WITH IP PA 70 - NEC JAN 112017 City of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R E C E I VFl. 0 CITY OF If WWALA 2 9 2046 PERMIT CENTER i COPYRIGHT OO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 D to0 GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES., A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD CONDI TIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELFWITHTHE WORKPRIORTO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVEFIRSTSALVAGERIGHTSONALL MATERIALSANO EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BEING REMOVED. F. TIE EXI T SIGNS, FROG EYES AND NIGHT L IGHTS INTO THE LIGHTING CIRCUITAHEAD OF SWITCHES. G. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE CIRCUIT POSITION. H. CIRCUI TS REFER TO PANEL "A ", UNLESS INDICA TED OTHERWISE. LIGHTING NOTES. - 1. OVERRIDE SWITCH, SEEDETAIL 1/E3.1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. CEILINGMOUNTED OCCUPANCYSENSOR . 3. PROVIDEA 1000 WATT L UTRON DIVA DIMMER, COLOR TO MA TCHLIGHT SWITCHESAND RECEPTACLES. Permit wo. D-1 C0 Pian review approv l is sub!ect to errors and Omissions. Approval of consiruciien d04--UIfl011tS does not rauIhoriza the violation of any a opted code or ordina Seco ;yt of a rovo �j PP �yan c n - ns a c,rz By: Date: City of TukvWla BUILDING DIVISION No changes shall FO to the scope of VJor€t without prior approval of TBuilding Division. MOTE: RICvi740113 c ill require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. �SE�'��, PLRMIT REQUIRED FOR: C14 chanied 0 Qectrioai PrasPlplM Ing City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED .FOR COMPLIANCE WITH IP PA 70 - NEC JAN 112017 City of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION R E C E I VFl. 0 CITY OF If WWALA 2 9 2046 PERMIT CENTER i COPYRIGHT OO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 z W LU 0 crCLz z W D to0 ,I o 00 �} j OCD o^ 00 000 1H v 0 c c a� a� c.� z W LU 0 crCLz z W •- NEL ® -. • wl FA NEL A l • • 10G, J14"C - 1 0 1 \ FA NEL H 1 78 ABOVE F •w. •-PANEL - ��- 1 1 .. ®EQUIP P1 A FORM ... f 9I WALL NOTE J & 11 BE 6I , . 81111 w 82 N5TE 2 [BRE 10 -�• . /' 82 P-1 •' IiiM STUDIO 22 STUDIO 20 112-2169 61 120 -50" 82 +50" +50" 82 ®46 77 +90 73 73 OC 6� 79 J 1 STUDIO 24 77 73 81 NOTE 4 81+90"81 NO 9 +45" 71 STUDIO 23 +45" 81 of +45" 62 +90" 52 A -h 62 66 64 NOTE 4 �ss 90" 66 NOTE 4 68 70 90" 70 545" 70 124 WP,GF 77 J NOTE 4 123 A-16 AHU-1 NOTE 8 NOTE STUDIO 25 D 77 r7j 7.365 125 !: A 78 I 58 STUDIO 127 AO35 127 J DAMPER 11NOTE WP,GFCI A-16 EF -1 NOTE 8 l :+45" 58 58 ENTRY 154 60J NOTE 4 626 STUDIO 28 128 62 ®46 I -K 1174 111 NOTE 4 54 STUDIO 26 +90" 54 126 5¢ 54 8; STUDIO 31 OTE 81- 131 i 131 +45"rrn +9 78 _ am== 57 45 5 57 STUDIO 19 45 STUDIO 17 117 J 55 119 rNOTE NOTE 4 _57 I->4 5J �42 40 NOTE 4 ,42 NOTE + 30 26 30 STUDIO 13 go" 113 3 26 �78 CORRIDOR 148 +45" 45 CORRIDOR 45 149 42 e 34 STUDIO 114 +90" 11434 16 +45" 34 91 18. 1 NOTE 4 34 18 J 32 STUDIO 10 Lim 111011 38 +45" 38 18 STUDIO 15 +g0" 38 115 +45" +90" 18 tm 3B STUDIO 16 116 42 38 +45"+4 n +90" +45"J8 38 NOTE 4 42 42 J 36 106 J 4 37 37� 108 NOTE 4 108 +90" 45" X04 108 ;7 1+45" STUDIO 108 140 1+90" 108 r.Trjr� 22 NOTE 9 WP,GFCI A-16 STUDIO 11 EF -2 NOTE 8 111 84 WOMENS AC 147 22 - r NOTE 9 �44 G A -16 I VESTIBULE A-16 HU -4 145 NOTE 8 DNOTE 5 78 AO35 J DAMPER 5-11all, , +45"1 41 41 9 +90" 411 41� STUDIO 7 4 107 1 MENS 146 8� AC 0 (D+90" +45 15 15 15 +45 15 I'- ,x.11 —� 26 STUDIO 3 c0 NOTE NOTE STUDIO 12 2 J 2k 45,v 22 11290" n 23 26 22 34 STUDIO 114 +90" 11434 16 +45" 34 91 18. 1 NOTE 4 34 18 J 32 STUDIO 10 Lim 111011 38 +45" 38 18 STUDIO 15 +g0" 38 115 +45" +90" 18 tm 3B STUDIO 16 116 42 38 +45"+4 n +90" +45"J8 38 NOTE 4 42 42 J 36 106 J 4 37 37� 108 NOTE 4 108 +90" 45" X04 108 ;7 1+45" STUDIO 108 140 1+90" 108 r.Trjr� 22 NOTE 9 WP,GFCI A-16 STUDIO 11 EF -2 NOTE 8 111 84 WOMENS AC 147 22 - r NOTE 9 �44 G A -16 I VESTIBULE A-16 HU -4 145 NOTE 8 DNOTE 5 78 AO35 J DAMPER 5-11all, , +45"1 41 41 9 +90" 411 41� STUDIO 7 4 107 1 MENS 146 8� AC 0 (D+90" +45 15 15 15 +45 15 I'- ,x.11 —� 9 STUDIO 3 c0 >3 +90"1 NOTE 105 23 n 23 00 11 +90" 21 11 11 NOTE 4 J > c J a� NOTE 4 23 15 NOTE 1 E10 _ U NOTE 10 GENERAL LIGHT/NG NOTES. - A. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWNARE BASED ONAS-BUIL T DRAWINGS PROV/DED BY THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FORACTUAL FIELD COND/TIONSAT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZEHIMSELF WITH THE WORKPR/OR TO BIDDINGAND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONS/BLE TO DEMOLISHALL EXISTINGAS REQUIRED TOALLOWFOR/NSTALLAT/ON AND CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. REMOVEALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, FIXTURES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC., NOT SHOWN THA TARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. PULL EL CTR/CAL BACK TO SRL ICE BOX. D. ITIS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OFALL EQUIPMENT NOT REUSED AS PART OF THE NEW WORK. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRSTSAL VA GE RIGHTS ONALL MATER/ALSAND EQUIPMENT. E. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITSAS NEEDED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING DEVICES, FIXTURES, OR EQUIPMENT NOT BE/NG REMOVED. F. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE TELEPHONE COMPANY TO VERIFY THE NUMBER OFL/NES COM/NG INTO THE BUILDING. PHONE LINESARE REQUIRED TO EACH STUDIO FROM THE CENTRAL PHONE BLOCK. CLEARL YMARK STUDIO ROOM NUMBERS ON THE PHONE BLOCKFOR EASE OF CONNECT/ON. G. COORDINATEEXACTLOCATIONOFALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES WITH ARCH/TEC TURA L SHEETA 1.6. H. THE NUMBER NEXT TO THE DEVICE INDICATES THE C/RCU/T NUMBERAND REFERS TO PANEL "B , UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. I. CIRCUIT STUDIO RECEPTACLES DOWNSTREAM OF THE GFCI RECEPTACLE ADJACENT TO THE DOOR. J. REFER TOARCHITECTURAL PLANS FORALL D/MENS/ONSANDDEV/CE LOCA TIONS. POWER AND SYSTEMS NOTES. - 1. PROVIDE FINAL CONNECT/ON TO SIGNAGE. COORDINATELOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR. PROVIDELOCAL DISCONNECT SWITCH MOUNTED /NAN INCONSPICUOUS L OCA TION. EACHSIGN C/RCUI T SHALL HA VE SEPARA TE NEUTRAL AND SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTORS. 2. PROV/DEA PLYWOOD TELEPHONEBACKBOARD. COORDINATEEXACT SIZEAND LOCA TION W/TH THE OWNER AND THEARCH/TECT. BACKBOARD SHALL BEPAINTED WITH TWO COATS OFGREYF/RE RETARDANT PA INT PRO VIDE A GROUND BAR MOUNTED ON TELEPHONE BACKBOARD W/THA #6 GROUND WIRE TO THE POWER SYSTEMS GROUND/NG ELECTRODE SYSTEM. ALL TELEPHONE, DATA AND TELEVISIONCABLES SHALL BE ROUTED TO THIS LOCA TION. 3. VERIFYEXACT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EQUIPMENT ROOM EQUIPMENT WITH THE OWNERANo THE ARCHITEC T PRIOR TO ROUGH /N. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROV/DEA 36"FLEXIBLE WHIP CONDUITAT f24" A. F. F FOR THREE DUPLEX RECEPTACLES MOUNTED IN COUNTER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM FINAL INS TALLATION AND CONNECT/ON TO THREE DUPLEXRECEPTA CLESAFTER FIXTURE IS INSTALLED. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH THE LIGHT SWITCH/CONTACTOR. 5. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AND SHUT -DOWN RELAY SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR INS TALLA TION BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COORD/NA TECOMPATIBIL/TY WITH THE FIREALARM SYSTEM. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDEA REMOTE TEST STA TION WHERE REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AH✓. COORD/NA TE REMOTE TEST STA TION MOUNTING LOCATION WITH OWNER A ND FIRE MA RSHA L L. FINAL WIRING SHALL BE B Y THE EL EC TRICA L CONTRACTOR. 6. NOT USED. 7. NOT USED 8. DISCONNECT SWITCH IS PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INTEGRAL WITH THEEQU/PMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PULL C/RCUITFROM DISCONNECTSW/TCHASINDICA TED. 9. WEATHERPROOF GFCI SERVICE RECEPTACLE IS PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INTEGRAL WITH THE EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PULL CIRCU/TASINDICATED. 10. WIRE THIS SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE THROUGH THE CONTACTOR/L/GHT SWITCH. 11. PROV/DE(3)DUPLEXRECEPTACLESANDM0UNT, REFER TOARCHITECTURAL SHEETA 1.6 FOR ROUGH IN HEIGHTS. 12. PERFERRED LOCA TION OF FIREALARM CONTROL PANEL. FIRE ALARM DES/GN INA DEFFERED SURMITTAI. i COPYRIGHTO 2016 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 Lfw, VN c0 ' o n 00) .0 00 C-) 00 •t7 SO � c WJ a� •c _ U TORK NSI SS403, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS. F LOCATED BY FRONT DOOR. �TS TC -1 TORK NSI DG200A, OR APPROVED EQUAL DIGITAL TIMECL OCK WITH RESERVE POWER TORK #55A200, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS L OCA TED BY BACK DOOR. — T-� — L— — -I A-1 O� STI r LTG L A-3�—� �o I LLTG —_J I I _ A-5— ��- LTG ] J -J A- 7 L LTG __1 A-11 I I I FLTG7 °� r` L — J A-17 % EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE L TG J A-21 — o- KEY DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTICS FEEDER PANEL LOCAL LOCAL SCHEDULE i L LTG I�--�---o- TC1 30A A- 29 �-o—I HP KVA FLA VOLTAGE PH CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* SWITCH FUSE NOTES EF -1 EXHAUST 3/4 1.3 1.6 460 3 3#12+#12G H1 30A,3P I �IIV 2 I FAN FLUORESCENT SPARE---I--o-I HALON CONTROL PANEL REVISION NUMBER IN 3/4"C. DISC. SW. ®FUSE SURFACE OR PENDANT( EF -2 EXHAUST 3/4 1.3 1.6 460 3 HALO H1 SW SECTION OR ELEVATION BUBBLE 2 120 TRANSFORMER X XX REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT WITH w + SECTION OR ELEVATION N#13/4 C2G NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER D30A, RECESSEDWFLORESCENT K AHU-1 AIR HANDLING -- 11.3 14.1 460 3 3#12+#12G H1 30A,3P NUMBER 1,3,4 # UNIT O RECESSED LUMINAIRE DOWNLIGHT ��<� CHIME w REFERENCE BUBBLE IN 3/4"C. DISC. SW. ❑ SURACEMOUFNTED OLUMINAIRE� l� N FD --Dl AHU-2 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 3#10+#10G H1 30A,3P NUMBER 1,3,4 UNIT WALL BRACKET LUMINAIRE EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER EQUIPMENT KEY IN 3/4"C. -3 �- DISC. SW. ® RECESSED DIRECTIONAL Q AHU-3 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 3#10+#10G IN 3/4"C. H1 30A,3P DISC. SW. NAVILITE 1,3,4 l_SURFACE UNIT DIRECTIONAL ® FS FLOW SWITCH Fj]JUNCTION BOX _ LUMINAIRE AHU-4 AIR HANDLING -- 16.2 20.4 460 3 � 3#10+#10G H1 30A, 3P X 1,3,4 _ UNIT Iv -i# OF LUMINAIRES SHOWN H<HORN/ STROBE IN 3/4'C. }- DISC. SW. EXIT LUMINAIRE, ARROWSMANUAL ® INDICATE DIRECTION, SHADING F7m GENERAL NOTES: OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. VERIFY THE ABOVE SCHEDULED INFORMATION WITH DIVISION 15 CONTRACTOR AND SUBMITTALS. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY BY OTHERS DEVIATIONS FROM THE ABOVE SCHEDULED INFORMATION PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF POINTS OF CONNECTION 26W -TRIPLE TUBE WITH DIVISION 15 PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. - - - CONTROL CIRCUIT SCHEDULE NOTES (NOTES LISTED BELOW MAY OR MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS SET OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS): SMOKE DETECTOR 1. NEMA 3R DISCONNECT SWITCH. ®w LOCAL MOTOR STARTER PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. 2. ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH CONTACTOR FOR CONTROL. SS O SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTOR 3. CONNECT SMOKE DETECTOR PER PLAN NOTES. (w INDICATES TYPE) NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. 4. PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH SIZE PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. SPEAKER WITH 5. THIS RTU IS EXISTING AND IS BEING RE -FED FROM THE NEW PANEL LOCATION. F7, LOCAL COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER aw X 6. CIRCUIT THIS FAN THROUGH THE LIGHT SWITCH SERVING THIS ROOM. P VISUAL INDICATOR TORK NSI SS403, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS. F LOCATED BY FRONT DOOR. �TS TC -1 TORK NSI DG200A, OR APPROVED EQUAL DIGITAL TIMECL OCK WITH RESERVE POWER TORK #55A200, OR EQUAL TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH SET FOR TWO HOURS L OCA TED BY BACK DOOR. — T-� — L— — -I A-1 O� STI r LTG L A-3�—� �o I LLTG —_J I I _ A-5— ��- LTG ] J -J A- 7 L LTG __1 A-11 I I I FLTG7 °� r` L — J A-17 % -�—� L TG J A-21 — o- o I LTG LOADS CONTROLLED REMARKS ELECTROMECHANICAL A-31 >--f o I 24-HOUR LTG 1 A-33--moo-� i L LTG I�--�---o- TC1 30A A- 29 �-o—I F H 1-14,16 ,18 >— I M P-1 F X CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* H1-20,22,24 XI M EF -1 1 .17SPST A-20 TC1 A-73 I SPARE I MIF M EF -2 N B-44� VS FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR z B-46> I �IIV EQUIPMENT (• INDICATES TYPE) I J FLUORESCENT SPARE---I--o-I HALON CONTROL PANEL AUTOMATIC TIMER SCHEDULE MARK TYPE VOLTAGE BATTERY BACKUP LOADS CONTROLLED REMARKS ELECTROMECHANICAL DIGITAL 24-HOUR 7 -DAY ASTRONOMIC SWITCH CHANNELS CONTACTS TC1 30A 12 X 120V 2 SPDT 120 X CONTACTORS C-1 & C-2 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL* TC2 XI 1 1 .17SPST A-20 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL 120 X VARIES MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL*1 * SEE DETAIL 1/E3.1 CONTACTOR SCHEDULE MARK TYPE CONTACT RATING CONTACT QTY. COIL VOLTAGE CIRCUITS CONTROLLED CONTACTOR CONTROLLED BY: REMARKS ELEC. MECH. N.O. N. C. C-1 X MISCELLANEOUS 30A 12 DESCRIPTION 120V A -1,3,5,7,9,11,15,17,19,29,B-27,29,44,46 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL C-2 X 30A 2 FRCP 120V A-20 TC1 MOUNT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE ADJACENT TO PANEL Fc -__2 -1 A-20--1----0-� EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SPARE iT l L --- B-27::-- ' I SHOW RECEPTACLES B-29 % o-� I-o�- SHOW RECEPTACLES i SQUARE D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L, OR EQUAL, ELECTRICALLY HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH NORMA LL Y OPEN CONTACTS MOUNTED IN NEMA I ENCLOSURE LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL 1 SCALE: NTS E.1 SQUARE 'D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L, OR EQUAL, ELECTRICALL Y HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH NORMAL Y OPEN CONTACTS MOUNTED IN NEMA I ENCLOSURE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL LEGEND LAMP SPECIFICATION MOUNTING NOT ALL ITEMS LISTED BELOW ARE USED ON THIS SET OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (SEE GENERAL NOTE A) ONE -LINE LIGHTING FIRE ALARM N MISCELLANEOUS POWER DISTRIBUTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION WEATHERHEAD SERVICE E3 2x2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FRCP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (D THERMOSTAT -LINE VOLTAGE ® w ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION = CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 RECESSED FLUORESCENT EARA FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ® FLAG NOTE EQUIPMENT (• INDICATES TYPE) —�— DISCONNECT SWITCHRECESSED FLUORESCENT HCP HALON CONTROL PANEL REVISION NUMBER MDC MAIN DISTRIBUTION -= ®FUSE SURFACE OR PENDANT( _�� FUSED DISCONNECT 600 VOLTS AND UNDER F -O -P MOUNTED FLUORESCENT HALO REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT 1 SECTION OR ELEVATION BUBBLE MCC MOTORCONTROL CENTER 120 TRANSFORMER X XX REMOTE INDICATOR LIGHT WITH w + SECTION OR ELEVATION SDC SECONDARY NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER �( TRANSFORMER KEY I DICATES CONNECTION) RECESSEDWFLORESCENT K KEY TEST/RESET SWITCH 48W LED LETTER # REFERENCE DRAWING DISTRIBUTION CENTER (' X g NUMBER BR BUS RISER # D DELTA CONNECTION Y WYE CONNECTION O RECESSED LUMINAIRE DOWNLIGHT ��<� CHIME w REFERENCE BUBBLE PANELBOARD SHIELDED TRANSFORMER ❑ SURACEMOUFNTED OLUMINAIRE� l� N FD --Dl KE * REFERENCE LETTER # CE DRAWING PB PULL BOX - CURRENT TRANSFORMER Q FD—H] DETECTOR DOOR HOLDER 120 NUMBER T❑ TRANSFORMER X WALL BRACKET LUMINAIRE EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER EQUIPMENT KEY METER -3 �- POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ® RECESSED DIRECTIONAL Q FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER OO * INDICATES EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (2) JUNCTION BOX ® FEEDER KEY LUMINAIRE INTERFACE K NAVILITE N1WH l_SURFACE GROUND DIRECTIONAL ® FS FLOW SWITCH Fj]JUNCTION BOX _ LUMINAIRE X LITHONIA LE S 1 R 120/277 EL N FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPLIED GROUND BUS LIGHT TRACK EEI HORN X ® C LOCAL CONTACTOR _ Iv -i# OF LUMINAIRES SHOWN H<HORN/ STROBE ❑, LOCAL DISCONNECT WITH }- DRAWOUT DEVICE EXIT LUMINAIRE, ARROWSMANUAL ® INDICATE DIRECTION, SHADING F7m PULL STATION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION -----GROUND CONDUCTOR INDICATES LIGHTED FACES BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE []lLOCAL DISCONNECT - - - CONTROL CIRCUIT X S SMOKE DETECTOR X ®w LOCAL MOTOR STARTER PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. TRANSFER SWITCH (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL) ® SS O SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTOR NOTE C: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE, TRIM RINGS, ETC. FOR THE TYPE OF CEILING SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. (w INDICATES TYPE) NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. PANELBOARD LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO GENERATOR OR BATTERY PACKO SPEAKER WITH F7, LOCAL COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER aw X w INDICATES PANEL TYPE ® P VISUAL INDICATOR w(* INDICATES TYPE) FLOOR NUM E)R) IINDICATES PANEL LETTER)) Q OSFT THERMAL DETECTOR, FVNR FULL VOLTAGE L 208Y/120V, 240/120V 7 SOV E BATTERY PACK W/ LUMINAIRES ®RR FIXED TEMPERATURE OF RISE CTOR, NON -REVERSING �R E48OV l� LS LIFE SAFESTS REMOTE LUMINAIRE RATE RREEVVEERS NGAGE RV REDUCED VOLTAGE C CRITICAL AE AUTO -EQUIPMENT POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE EI -0 NUMBER OF HEADS AS SHOWN TAMPER SWITCH VISUAL INDICATOR 2S TWO SPEED C COMPUTER K KITCHEN A UPPERCASE LETTER INDICATES M MECHANICAL LUMINAIRE KEY MOTOR o LOWERCASE LETTER INDICATES CONTROLLING SWITCH VSD VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE TVSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION ®M METER SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT KEY O GENERATOR ® PROTECTIVE RELAY --- POWER OUTLETS — COMMUNICATIONS SWITCHING — RACEWAYS (# INDICATES ANSI NUMBER) TC 11MECLOCK SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION PES PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH B- SINGLE RECEPTACLE*TELEPHONE ® TERMINAL CABINET OR BACKBOARD S SWITCH (w INDICATES TYPE) HOME RUN TO PANEL, -'' CIRCUITS AS INDICATED FG -F-11 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER ® SINGLE RECEPTACLE, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET SINGLE POLE SWITCH RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY ENCLOSURE A SINGLE RECEPTACLE, �W TELEPHONE OUTLET, FOR 2 DOUBLE -POLE 3 THREE WAY RUN II N NI10 N.C. CONTACTS CEILING MOUNTED WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE 4 FOUR WAY RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY N.O. NORMALLY OPEN DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® TELEPHONE OUTLET, CC CONTACTOR CONTROL D DIMMER ------RUN, UNDERGROUND OR UNDERFLOOR N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED FLOOR MOUNTED K KEY OPERATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ® FLOOR MOUNTED > DATA OUTLET LV LOW VOLTAGEGROUND CONDUCTOR ® DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ® DATA OUTLET, FLOOR MOUNTED M MANUAL MOTOR STARTER RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY DOWN CEILING MOUNTED ® COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND MTO MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RACEWAY OR WIRING ASSEMBLY DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DATA OUTLET THERMAL OVERLOADS UP DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE,® ® COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR WALL MOUNTED ® SURFACE RECEPTACLE STRIP FLOOR MOUNTED DATA OUTLET, FLOOR MOUNTED $ DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, -B TELEVISION OUTLET P LIGHT-LOAD ON PO PILOT LIGHT -LOAD OFF �n SURFACE RACEWAY, DEVICES AS INDICATED CEILING MOUNTED © CLOCK OUTLET T TIME AAS NOTTED PURPOSE OUTLET DICTATION OUTLET V VARIABLE SPEED a LOWER CASE LETTER BUSHED CONDUIT INDICATES EQUIPMENT �� MODULAR CONNECTOR AND SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET © CHIME CONTROLLED FLEXIBLE CABLE AS NOTED, FLOOR MOUNTED © BUZZER/BELL SS DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING �+—SEAL OFF FITTING DUPLEX SPLIT WIREDEPTACLE, ❑' PUSH BUTTON TC TIMECLOCK = CAPPED CONDUIT e= DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT TELE/POWER POLE, DEVICCES AS INDICATED OS CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR INTERRUPTING DEVICE POKE -THROUGH, FP—E-SFI _EL PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE, DEVICES AS INDICATED PC PHOTO ELECTRIC LIGHT CONTROL WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING DEVICE ®A ABANDONED POKE -THROUGH QA SWITCHBANK DESIGNATION TELE/POWER POLE, DEVICES AS INDICATED ® C LOCAL CONTACTOR ABBREVIATIONS A AMPERE COMM COMMUNICATION GEN GENERATOR NIC NOT IN CONTRACT SPKR SPEAKER AC ALTERNATING CURRENT OR COUNTER/BACK CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT (NL) NEW LOCATION SS STAINLESS STEEL AF ABOVE SPLASH AMPERE FRAME CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER CU COPPER HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HPS HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM N6 NORMALLY OPEN NTS NOT TO SCALE STD STANDARD SV SOLENOID VALVE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR DET DETAIL HTR HEATER OC ON CENTER SW SWITCH AFG ABOVE FINSHED GRADE DIA DIAMETER HV HIGH VOLTAGE P POLE SWBD SWITCHBOARD AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY DISC DISCONNECT IG ISOLATED GROUND PB PUSH BUTTON SYM SYMMETRICAL AL ALUMINUM DIST DSTRIBUTION INC INCANDESCENT PES PHOTO ELECTRIC SWITCH TELE TELEPHONE ALM ALARM DN DOWN ISC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT PF POWER FACTOR TEMP TEMPERATURE APPROX APPROXIMATE DWG DRAWING JB JUNCTION BOX PH OR 0 PHASE T'STAT THERMOSTAT ARCH AT ARCHITECTURAL AMPERE TRIP (E) EXISTING LTG LIGHTING PNL PANEL TR TAMPER RESISTANT ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH EEOC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELEC ELECTRICAL LV LOW VOLTAGE MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRI PRIMARY PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE TYP TYPICAL TVSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE AUTO AUX AUTOMATIC AUXILIARY EM EMERGENCY EMT MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (R) REMOVE SUPPRESSION BJ BONDING JUMPER ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EQUIP EQUIPMENT MECH MECHANICAL MERC MERCURY VAPOR RCPt RECEPTACLE REV REVISION UG UNDERGROUND UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE BLDG BUILDING FC FOOTCANDLE MH METAL HALIDE (RL) REMOVE & RELOCATE POWER SUPPLY C CONDUIT FLEX FLEXIBLE MLO MAIN LUG ONLY RM ROOM V VOLT CB CIRCUIT BREAKER FLR FLOOR MV MEDIUM VOLTAGE RMC RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT VA VOLT-AMPERE CCT CIRCUIT FLUOR FLUORESCENT N NEUTRAL SCHED SCHEDULE W WIRE OR WATT CL CLG CENTER LINE CEILING G GROUND GEC GROUNDING ((N) NEW SEC SECONDARY WP WEATHERPROOF ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR Nt� NORMALLY CLOSED SFE SAFETY ENCLOSURE XFMR TRANSFORMER CMS COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER SPEC SPECIFICATION LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE LAMP SPECIFICATION MOUNTING (SEE GENERAL NOTE A) N w JQ Z v L W ¢ w m QUAN DESCRIPTION TYPE MARK MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER VOLTSED Of 0 REMARKS A HALO HTRIM:OUSI 999 H991CT 1 50W 4000K LED LED 120 X X NL/EM - PROVIDE IOTA IIS -375 -LED INVERTER B METALUX 24SR-LD2-48-C-UNV-L835-CD1-U 2 48W LED FL 120 X X RUN 3 WIRES FROM FIXTURE TO OCC SWITCH C BY OWNER 1 25WT-3SPIRAL CFL 120 X X MOUNT AT +66" AFF, COORDINATE WITH G.C. E SURE-LITES AEL2 - SUPPLIED IND 120 X X X EMERGENCY LIGHT, ON WITH LOSS OF POWER F BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE CFL 120 X PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. 2700 K NAVILITE N1WH - SUPPLIED IND 120 X X X LITHONIA LE S 1 R 120/277 EL N - SUPPLIED FL 120 X X X TO BE APPROVED BY OWNER PRIOR TO PURCHASE P BY OTHERS 1 26W -TRIPLE TUBE CFL 120 X X PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE BY OTHERS. LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: NOTE A: FL=FLUORESCENT, CFL=COMPACT FLUORESCENT, IND=INCANDESCENT, MH=METAL HALIDE, HPS=HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM, LPS=LOW PRESSURE SODIUM, MV=MERCURY VAPOR, LED=LIGHT EMITTING DIODE NOTE B: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LAMPS. ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE BY THE SAME LAMP MANUFACTURER IN ORDER TO MATCH COLOR PHOSPHORS. ALL FOUR FOOT FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE OF THE LOW MERCURY CONTENT TYPE. NOTE C: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE, TRIM RINGS, ETC. FOR THE TYPE OF CEILING SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. NOTE D: FOR EXIT LIGHTS, COORDINATE MOUNTING CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT, DIRECTIONAL ARROWS, NUMBER OF FACES, ETC. WITH PLAN DRAWINGS. NOTE E: CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF CEILING SYSTEMS AND PROVIDE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED FOR ALL DOWNLIGHTS. NOTE F: FIXTURE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE WALL AND/OR CEILING THICKNESS PRIOR TO ORDERING. ` Y t . $ +•, b �� "a JAN 112017 City of -Tr kWila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUIWIll-A DEC 2 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 ;co 30 )00 j0rn - 0 M �O r �V00 7 .V) � C2 0� N )0 O LL Z W W O CCZ Z w H 2 CDQ k 0 0 cr W 0 z Q U) 1— Lo M I SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES PANEL CONDUCTORS H1 B -S3 Voltage An-pacity Phase Wire 480 / 200 3 4 A 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 Voltage Ampacity Phase Wi re 208 / 400 3 4 120 Brkr. Ckt Brkr. I Other Load Amp. PI. No- Ckt Brkr- Ph. No. Amp- PI. Brkr. Load Load Type(va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor I Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION AHU-1 Brkr. Load Ltg- Main Circuit Breaker (300A) Mounting RECESSED Aic Rating 10,000 Notes: x PROV ®E LOCK -ON DEV ICE DESCRIPTION Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt. Motor Kitch- Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Load Amp- I PI. No. Ckt Brkr. PK No. Amp.PI. Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt Motor Kitch. DESCRIPTION Other LTG: STUDIOS FRONT 1400 1 B 4 5420 5420 - 1400 201 1 1 A 2 20 1 1320 5420 540 1320 HWH-1 LTG: STUDIOS LEFT 1350 5 5420 25 7 A 8 25 1350 20 1 3 B 4 20 1 1130 9 1130 WASHER LTG: STUDIOS RIGHT 1400 - RCPT: STUDIO 5420 540 1400 20 1 5 C 6 30 PANEL A VIA XFMR 24961 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 2496 DRYER LTG: HALL 1450 425 425 EF -1 112.5 KVA 1450 20 1 7 A 8 2 2496 540 20 1 2496 - LTG: WALL / NL 1000 5000 38900 3 17 C 18 1 31 425 1000 20 1 9 B 10 30 0 2496 A 201 15 4251 2496 DRYER LTG: RESTIMECH 900 540 540 540 0 900 20 1 11 C 12 2 2496 1080 0 2496 - LIGHTING CONTROL 4251 425 - 1 300 300 20 1 13 A 14 20 1 1130 B 1130 WASHER EF -1 0 27 670 0 61 670 20 1 15 B 16 20 1 720 0 720 RCPT: ROOFTOP LTG: VAULT PENDANT 900 20 1 25 0 31 900 20 1 17 C 18 20 1 972 0 972 GARBAGE DISPOSAL EF -2 1 540 830 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 830 20 1 19 A 20 20 1 1200 1200 1620 SIGNAGE LTG:CENTER 1200 A 13810 5401 201 1131 10801 1200 20 1 21 B 22 20 1 360 1 360 RCPT: TELEPHONE RCPT: EQUIPMENT B 1 540 0 41 G 14210 540 20 1 23 C 24 20 1 1130 36 20 1130 WASHER RCPT: JAN RCPT: STUDIO 15 180 6701 73 PHASE 850 20 1 25 A 25 30 A B C 2496 Lighting 5-3 4.7 3.2 2496 DRYER FACP 31.2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 300 300 20 1 27 B 28 2 2496 6.6 5-3 5.0 16.9 2496 - PUMP PA 1620 1 16201 304 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR 304 20 1 29 C 30 20 1 0 80 20 SPARE LTG: HALL 1200 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 TOTAL 1200 20 1 31 A 321 20 11 0 0.0 Receptacles Remaining SPARE LTG: HALL 1100 0.0 900 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 11001 20 1 33 B 341 20 1 1 0 Total for Phase 12.1 13.4 13.3 ISPARE DAMPER 120V CKT Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. Panel Total Total Ampacity 19.4 54 200 200 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 I 0 SPARE PANEL B 14.5 40 31000 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 11 3 A B C 31000 200 0.0 0.0 0.0 37 A 38 10.0 0 9.0 9.0 9.0 13.5 Motors Largest ....................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0-0 33200 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 33200 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 39 B 40 0 Panel Total Total Ampacity 23.5 65 - 30200 30200 3 41 C 42 0 LOAD SUMMARY PHASE TOTAL PHASE A -B 0 BALANCING B -C Percentages 6 C -A 6 A B C Lighting 5.3 4.7 3.2 16A Receptacles Fist 10 Kw 31-2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 43.1 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 1.1 2.6 0.7 2.4 1.4 ............ 5.7 Kitchen 0-0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 6.6 5-3 5.2 17.1 Total for Phase 74.4 74.8 70.3 Panel Total Total Ampacity 93.7 260 KVA AMPS I SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS H1 B -S3 Voltage An-pacity Phase Wire 480 / 200 3 4 277 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- Main Circuit Breaker (200A) Mounting KMr;�5seD Aic Rating 22,000 Notes: ' PROVDE LOCK -ON DEVICE DESCRIPTION Load Type (va) Ltg- Rcpt Motor Kitch- Brkr. Ckt Brkr. I Other Load Amp. PI. No- Ckt Brkr- Ph. No. Amp- PI. Brkr. Load Load Type(va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor I Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION AHU-1 Brkr. Load Ltg- 3746 DESCRIPTION 3746 20 11 A 1 2 1 25 5420 5420 AHU-3 - 2 20 3746 720 3746 3 1 B 4 5420 5420 - - 3 3746 4 20 3746 3 5 C 6 3 5420 5420 540 AHU-2 1 540 5420 5 5420 25 7 A 8 25 .5420 5420 AHU4 - 1080 5420 1080 5420 9 B 10 54201 5420 - - RCPT: STUDIO 5420 540 5420 3 11 C 12 3 5420 5420 10 20 PANEL A VIA XFMR 5300 31200 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 6600 43100 150 13 A 141 15 425 425 EF -1 112.5 KVA 4-100134300 1100 540 5300 45400 15 B 161 425 425 540 20 1 32001307001 A 14 20 5000 38900 3 17 C 18 1 31 425 425 - 1 1260 20 1 15 0 19 A 201 15 4251 425 EF -2 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 540 540 0 21 B 221 42511 425 - 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 1080 0 23 C 24 3 4251 425 - 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 11 0 25 A 26 0 20 1121 540 B 22 20 1 1440 0 27 B 28 0 61 900 20 1 23 C 24 20 0 29 C 30 0 SPARE 540 0 20 1 25 0 31 A 32 0 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 12 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1080 1080 0 33 B 1 341 0 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1260 0 35 C 1361 0 C 30 20 1 16201 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 13 01 37 A 13810 5401 201 1131 10801 A 32 20 1 5401 1 0 39 B 14010 1260 1 1260 20 1 33 B 34 20 0 41 G 14210 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 6 540 LOAD SUMMARY 540 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 6 1260 73 PHASE 20 1 TOTAL A 38 20 PHASE BALANCING A -B B -C C -A Percentages 2 7 5 1620 A B C RCPT: STUDIO 15 Lighting 5-3 4.7 3.2 16.5 Receptacles First 10 Kw 31.2 34-3 30.7 96.2 10.0 Remaining 28.7 28.7 28.7 43.1 540 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................................... Remaining 1.1 20.9 20.9 20.9 1-4 62.6 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 6.6 5-3 5.0 16.9 Total for Phase 92.7 95-0 88.5 1620 1 16201 RCPT: STUDIO 16 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR Panel Total Total Ampacity 150.4 KVA 181 AMPS 0 540 I no 480-208/120v, 30 112.5 kVA TRANSFORMEI SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS B -S1 B -S3 B -S2 Voltage Ampacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- 3 7,662 Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 FFEDTHROUGH LUGS Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: DESCRIPTION Load Type (v a) Ltg. Rcpt I Motor Kdch- Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Other Load Amp. I PI. No- Ckt Brkr. PK No. Amp. I PI. Brkr. Load Ltg- Load Ty pe (v a) RcpL Motor Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 5 540 RCPT: STUDIO 17 540 20 1 1 A 2 20 1 720 720 RCPT: BREAK RM TVS RCPT: STUDIO 5 1440 1080 1440 20 1 3 B 4 20 1 1300 1300 RCPT: MICROWAVE RCPT: STUDIO 4 540 1 1 540 20 1 5 C 6 20 1 goo 900 RCPT: REFRIG. RCPT: STUDIO 1080 48 1080 20 1 7 A 8 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 540 49 540 20 1 9 B 10 20 1 12601 1260 RCPT: STUDI08 RCPT: STUDIO 1080 540 1080 20 1 11 C 12 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 3 540 C 540 20 1 13 A 14 20 1 1620 1620 RCPT: STUDIO RCPT: STUDIO 3 12601 1 1260 20 1 15 B 16 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 540 540 20 1 17 C 18 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 10 RCPT: STUDIO 2 1080 1 1080 20 1119 RCPT: STUDIO 27 A 20 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 11 RCPT: STUDIO 2 540 60 540 20 1121 540 B 22 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 11 RCPT: STUDIO 2 900 61 900 20 1 23 C 24 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 12 SPARE 540 0 20 1 25 A 26 201 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 12 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1080 1080 20 1 27 B 28 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: SHOW WINDOW 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 22 1260 20 1 29 C 30 20 1 16201 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 13 RCPT: STUDIO 1 540 540 5401 201 1131 10801 A 32 20 1 5401 1 540 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 1 1260 1 1260 20 1 33 B 34 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: STUDIO 14 RCPT: STUDIO 6 540 72 540 20 1 35 C 36 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 6 1260 73 1260 20 1 37 A 38 20 1 1620 1620 RCPT: STUDIO 15 RCPT: STUDIO 540 540 540 20 1 39 B 40 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 16 RCPT: STUDO7 1260 12601 20 1 41 C 42 20 1 1620 1 16201 RCPT: STUDIO 16 LOAD SUMMARY RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 0 540 20 1 79 A 80 20 1 g00 PHASE RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 TOTAL PHASE A -B 10 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 0 9 81 A B C ffi Lighting 0.0 0-0 0.0 0.0 Receptacles Remaining 12.1 13.4 13.3 19.4 TOTAL 0.0 900 Motors Largest ........................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ............ 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Total for Phase 12.1 13.4 13.3 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. Panel Total Total Ampacity 19.4 54 KVA AMPS 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 no 480-208/120v, 30 112.5 kVA TRANSFORMEI II L124 -J O 200A1 FRS 200A .L ------ I V i O - L-t--L� SERVICE GUTTER 480/277V, 30, 4W GROUNDING 2- + NEUTRAL BI ENCLOSURE TO TO TO METAL MADE BUILDING WATER ELECTRODE(S) STEEL / SERVICE PIPE ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NTS 1 E3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE B -S3 B -S2 Voltage Arnpacity Phase Wire Voltage Ampacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 FFEDTHROUGH LUGS DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Load Type (v a) Ltg. Rcpt Motor Kith. I Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr- Ckt Brkr. Load Amp. PI.. No. Ph. No. Amp, I PI. Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Type (v a) Rcpt Motor Koch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 17 540 540 20 1 43 A 44 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: TV'S RCPT: STUDIO 17 1260 1440 1260 20 1 45 B 46 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: TVS RCPT: STUDIO 18 540 540 20 1 1 540 20 1 47 C 48 20 1 01 1 1260 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 18 14401 201 1191 1440 20 1 49 A 50 20 1 0 1SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 18 540 93 B 540 20 1 51 B 52 201 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 26 RCPT: STUDIO 18 1260 C 196 20 1260 20 1 53 C 54 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 26 RCPT: STUDIO 19 540 198 20 1 540 20 1 55 A 56 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 27 RCPT: STUDIO 19 1440 11 1440 1440 20 1 57 B 58 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 27 RCPT: STUDIO 20 540 540 540 5401 20 1 59 C 60 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 28 RCPT: STUDIO 20 1080 RCPT: STUDIO 39 SPARE 1080 20 1 61 A 62 20 1 14401 1 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 28 RCPT: STUDIO 21 540 540 20 1 63 B 64 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 21 1260 0 1260 20 1 65 C 66 2DI 1 900 900 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 22 540 20 1 111 B 540 20 1 67 A 68 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 22 10801 114 20 1 1080 20 1j 69 B 70 20 1 1080 10801 RCPT: STUDIO 29 RCPT: STUDIO 23 540 0 540 20 1 71 C 72 20 1 540 5401 RCPT: STUDIO 30 RCPT: STUDIO 23 1440 SPARE SPARE 1440 2D 1 73 A 174 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUD1030 RCPT: STUDIO 24 540 540 20 1 75 B 76 20 1 1080 1080 RCPT: BREAK RM RCPT: STUDIO 24 1440 1440 20 1 77 C 78 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 0 540 20 1 79 A 80 20 1 g00 900 RCPT: CORRIDOR RCPT: STUDIO 25 lEt 1440 20 1 81 B ffi 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: BREAK RM WATER FEATURE/TV TOTAL 900 20 1 83 C 84 20 1 360 360 RCPT: GEN/TOILET LOAD SUMMARY Remaining 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 10-2 9.1 8.8 PHASE TOTAL Panel Total Total Ampacity 14.5 40 PHASE A -B 9 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 11 3 A B C Lighting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Receptacles First 10 Kw 11.9 13.9 11.3 37.1 10.0 Remaining 9.0 9.0 9.0 13.5 Motors Largest ....................................................................................................................................... Remaining 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 . ............ 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 20.9 22.9 20.4 Panel Total Total Ampacity 23.5 65 KVA AMPS II L124 -J O 200A1 FRS 200A .L ------ I V i O - L-t--L� SERVICE GUTTER 480/277V, 30, 4W GROUNDING 2- + NEUTRAL BI ENCLOSURE TO TO TO METAL MADE BUILDING WATER ELECTRODE(S) STEEL / SERVICE PIPE ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NTS 1 E3.2 r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE PANEL <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE B -S3 1 Voltage Arnpacity Phase Wire 208 / 120 225 3 4 2 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- Main Lugs Only Mounting Aic Rating Notes: RECESSED 10,000 -- DESCRIPTION Load Type (va) Ltg. Rcpt Motor Kitch- Other Brkr. Ckt Brkr. Load Amp. PI. No. Ckt Brkr. Ph. No. Amp. I PI. I Brkr. Load Ltg. Load Ty pe (v a) RcpL Motor Kitch. Other DESCRIPTION RCPT: STUDIO 31 540 540 20 1 85 A 86 20 1 0 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 31 1440 1440 20 1 87 B 88 20 1 0 SPARE RCPT: STUDIO 32 540 540 20 1 89 C 90 20 1 54.0 540 RCPT: STUDIO 36 RCPT: STUDIO 32 1 1260 12601 201 1191 A 92 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 36 RCPT: STUDIO 33 540 5401 20 il 93 B 94 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 37 RCPT: STUDIO 33 1080 1080 20 1 951 C 196 20 1 1260 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 37 RCPT: STUDIO 34 540 540 20 1 971 A 198 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUD[038 RCPT: STUDIO 34 1620 1 1620 20 1 99 B 100 20 11 1440 1 14401 1 IRCPT:STUDIO38 RCPT: STUDIO 35 540 540 20 1 101 C 102 20 11 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 39 RCPT: STUDIO 35 1620 1620 20 1 103 A 104 20 1 1440 1440 RCPT: STUDIO 39 SPARE 0 20 1 105 B 106 20 1 540 540 RCPT: STUDIO 40 SPARE 0 20 1 107 C 108 20 1 12601 1260 RCPT: STUDIO 40 SPARE 0 20 1109 A 110 20 1 01 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 111 B 112 20 1 01 SPARE SPARE 0 2DI 1 113 C 114 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 115 A 116 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 117 B 118 20 1 0 SPARE SPARE 0 20 1 119 C 1201 20 1 0 SPARE SPACE 01 121 A 122 0 SPACE SPACE 0 123 B 124 0 SPACE SPACE 0 125 C 126 0 SPACE LOAD SUMMARY PHASE TOTAL PHASE A -B 11 BALANCING B -C C -A Percentages 4 14 A B C Lighting 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rece tacleS First 10 Kw 7.2 6.1 5.8 19.1 10.0 Remaining 3-0 3.0 3.0 4.5 Motors Largest .................................................................................................................................................... Remainin.. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 0.0 Kitchen 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other 0.0 0.0 0.0 0-0 Total for Phase 10-2 9.1 8.8 Panel Total Total Ampacity 14.5 40 KVA AMPS r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SCHEDULE <@>AMPERES CONDUCTORS AVAILABLE LET -THROUGH 1 24,268 -- 2 18,592 -- 3 7,662 -- 4 6,727 -- BASED ON A 500 KVA PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER. r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 FEEDER SCHEDULE KEY CONDUCTORS METALALLIC CONDUIT LI(IN) CONDUIT (IN) 1 2 3 3#1/0+#6G 4#350+#2G 4#3/0+#6G 1-1/2 3 2 -- -- -- REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CODE FOR INSTALLATION NATIONAL OF CONDUIT TYPE. r■ti I,l ,' } r 31 1. JAN 11 2017 City Of -Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � rIECEIVE CITY OF TUKWILA 0E('0 2 9 2016 PERP,JUT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY L2 ARCHITECTS i0 )00 O O) � M ) O n )V000 i .r7 L.2 o M C iw N V 0 LL z w w 0 IL H Z Q w H rr W 0 z CC ♦♦F_^ VJ T' L_ J C'7 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The following supplements all sections of this specification and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection. installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the drawings, and its derivery to the Owner complete in all respects ready for use. 1.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Plan all work so that it proceeds With a minimum of interference With other trades. Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit required in the Wilding construction for dWcal work and provide all special frames, sleeves and anchor bob as required. Coordinate the electrical work With the mechanical installotion. B. Work rines and establimhed heights shall be in strict accordance With architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specirmations extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all devations and detailed dimensions not shown. C. Lay out and coortrinate oil work well enough in advance to avoid confricts or interferences With other work in progress so that in case of interference the electrical layaut may be aftered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's resporroWdy. 1.04 COOPERATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS A. Perform this work in conformity with the construction called for by other trades and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Property connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere With their work B. Examine the drawings and specifications for the general and mechanical work and the work of other similar trades. Coordinate this work accoffingly, C. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which Wight pmvent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. 1.05 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Certain materials and equipment will be furnished under other sections and installed or connected under this section. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment Will be furnished by other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed. 1.06 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Work under these sections is shown in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, indicating the general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow these drawings in laying out the work and verify Spam for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended locatkin of outlets or equipment obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.07 EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES A. Equipment and fixtures shall be connected providing circuit continuity in accordance with applicable codes whether or not each Mece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such hims of equipment or fixtures, and the point of circuit origin. 1.08 NEW EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials of the same type or classification, and used for the some purpose, shall be products of the some manufacturer. Use only new, unweathered, and unused material, except as specifically noted. 1.09 PRODUCT USTING A. All mateni I I ent and devices shall be listed With Underwriters Laboratories (U or other notionally recognized testing agency and be furnished With a label indicating such listing. B. All required material, equipment and devices for projects in New York City, NY shall be litsted With the New York City Department of Buildings and be furnished with a Materials and Acceptance (MEA) number. C. All required material, equipment and devices for projects where the Owne?s insurance carrier is Factory Mutual (FM) shall be listed with Factory Mutual (FM) and be fumished With a label indicating such r1sting. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner and arign, level and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install equipment so that all parts am easily accessible for inspection, operation, maiintenance and repair. B. Where marring or disfigurement has occurred, replace or refinish the damaged surfaces as directed and to the satisfaction of the Architect. C. Supplementary Framing 1. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting electrical equipment 2. Provide froming members of standard rolled steel shapes, A-36 steel. Provide members welded to structural members equal to the specification for the main structural member. Provide Isimple bearrr type frarring with end connections welded or bolted for shear loads. Use contilevers when detailed or specifically approved by the ArWAect. The Architeces approval is required for location of supplementary framing. Use only certified welders where directed by Architect. 3. Design framing members for their actual loods, With allowable stresses specified by AISC, Without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vilration, in accordance with standard structural practices. Show on shop drawing supplementary framing, inducting design loads, member size and location. 4. When supplementary framing is indicated, verify that dimensions are suidable for the equipment fumished. Provide additional strength when equipment fumished is heavier than that specified. 3.02 OUTLET LOCATION A. Position of Outlets 1. Center all outlets with regard to panering, furring, and trim. Symmetrically arrange outlets in the room. Satisfactorily correct outlets improperly boated or installed. Repair or replace damaged firfmhes. Set outlets Numb and extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor Without projecting beyond some. 2. Install symmetrically all receptacles, switches. and outlets shown on the wood trim, and where necessary, set the long dimension of the plate horizontal, or ganged in tandem. B. Mounting heights, to the center of the box above finished floor, shall be as follows unless otherwise shown or indicated. Other mounting heights are incricated on the drawings by detaiii or by a plus dimension shown adjacent to the symbol. 1. Flush tumbler switches: 48 inches 2. Convenience receptacles: 18 inches 3. Telecommunications devices. 18 inches 4. Safety switches: 54 inches to operator 5. Television outlets- 18 inches 6. Panelboords: 72 inches to top 7. Fire alarm control panel: 72 inches to top B. Fire alarm notification appliances: Lens located above 80 inclies or 6 inches below ceiling, whichever is lower 3.03 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Cutting, Patching and Piercing 1. Obtaim written permitssion of the Architect before cutting or piercing structural members. 2. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective trades for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of drywall and finishing of materials inducting carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this work. Do not weaken walls, partitions or floors with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes. Patching and/or refinishing Will be determined by Archittect. 3. Sleeves through floors and walls to be black iron pipe, or paper, flush with walls, ceiffings or finished floors, sized to accommodate the raceway 4. Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part Miercing the waterproofing has been set in Mace, seal opening and make absolutely watertight. 5. Provide chrome -plated spring-cripped escutcheon Oates where exposed pipe passes through walls, floors or cetTing. Cover sleeves and entire opeWing made for the pipe Wb escutcheon plates. Provide air and watertight conduit openings through floor slabs, masonry wait% and continuous partitions. Tightly caulk space between conduit and building materials with asbestos mpe and non-flammable sealant B. searing: Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make weathertight and insed:proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress. C. Identification of Equipment- Provide for piece of e each juipment including disconnect switches and motor starter, a 3/64 thick, 10 minimum height white plastic 'Lamicoid" plate identificatkin tog with Wack letters. Use Whilionil' industrial adhesive by Goodyear, or equal, for mounting nameplates. Clearly identify on the Plow the equipment served and spell out the full name of the equiement such as "gr Handring Unit MU -11* and 'Hot Water Cir. Pump P-1 in rieu of abbreviated plan references such as "MU -1' or *P-1." D. Access to Equipment: Locate starters, switches, receptacles and pull boxes to provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance, and if concealed, provide acems doom Provide fire rated access doors where required by the fire resistance rating of the wall or coMing in which the door is installed. E. Protection of Apparatus, Materials and Equipment- Take such precoutions as necessary to property pratect all apparatim fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. The Architect may reject any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus, or equipment scratched, dented or otherwise damaged. F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the time of the contract and before final approval of the electrical installation, submit to the Architect two (2) copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data, wiring diagrams arid parts list of each item of electrical equipment installed under this contract as determined by the Architect. Submit all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. G. Painting Preparutbir Prepare all fittings, boxes, supports and parielboards, exposed to the weather, for painting by removing therefrom all oil, grease and dirt. Employ the necessary precautionary methods to prieverit scratching or defacing of all electrical apparatus and devices. H. Rust Prevention: Provide hot dip galvanized components for ferrous materials exposed to the weather. Provide a minimum of one coat of rust inhibiting primer paint for all materials after fabrication. color as selected by the Architect. 1. Tests: Provide the tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quarAy, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each WAm. Tests Will be conducted under the supervision of the Architect. J. Fire and Smoke Partition Penetrations 1. The Contractor shall familliarize himself With all fire rated construction and install his work so as to maintain the integrity of the fire code rating. Malintain rating of fire rated and smoke rated construction. Sleeves shall be steel or pre -manufactured sleeves similar to Pipe Shields, Inc., for bare Ope through fire walls and floors. model WFB, DFI3 or QDFB- For plaft Ope, use type WFB With one inch thick calcium silicate insulation encosed in metal sleeve extension two feet either side of fire rated, walls or floor. 1 2. Seal annular space around piping. I" fire and smoke rated floors, walls and partitions, use UL Wed maWal that rnaiintains fire rated wall and floor integrity, similar to RIV foam. Dow Coming 'Fire StW or Pipe Shields, Inc., model'WFB, DFB or QDFB. For non -rated walls and partitions, use Wineral or glass fiber insulation. K. Existing Conditions: For projects invoking a tenant improvement or renovation or remodel of an existing space: I 1. Existing conditions shown are based on as -built or shell drawings provided by the Owner and possibly limited field verification. The Contractor shall adjust for actual field conditions at no additional expense to the owner. 2. The Contractor shall famiriarize himself with the work prior to bidding and start of work. i 3. Remove all equipment devices. fixtures, conduits, supports, hangers, etc., not shown that am required to be removed in order to complete the new work. Recessed boxes and conduits concealed Within walls or floors that are to remain may be abandoned in place as long as the operiiings are patched and the conductors removed. 4. it is the responsibility of the contractor to dispose of all i equipment not mused as part of the new work. The Owner shall have first sakage rights on all materials and equipment. ' 5. Maintain continuity of circuits as needed to provide power to remaining devices, fixtures, or equipment not being removed. L Submittal Data: Within thirty days after award of contract furnish the Architect five shop drowing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cuts of all equipment to be used on this project. In these portforios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on drawings or scheduW. M. Codes. Permits and Fees 1. Perform work in accordance With the National Electrical Code and other appricable codes. Comply With applicable buildiing ordinances and codes. Where the contract documents exceed minimum requirements, the contract documents take precedence. 2. Comply With all requirements for permits, ricenses, fees and codes. Permids, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified. 3. Comply With the requirements of the applicable utirAy companies serving this project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coonfination of the work. N. Applicable Documents and Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials fumished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE 2. National Electrical Manufactureirs' Association - NEMA 3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - U.L 4. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 5. Federal Specifications - FED. SPEC. 6. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 7. American Standards Association - ASA 8. National Electrical Code - NEC 9. National Electrical Safety Code - NESC END OF SE10 101i IMM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RACEWAYS, DEVICES AND WIRING: A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Provide all raceway and wiring systems complete with all devices and coverplates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. All raceways shall be UL approved. B. Rigid Steel Conduit, Provide Anc-cooted rigid steel conduit conforming to Fed. Spec. WW -C-581. Provide conduit fitungs conforming to Fed. Spec. W -F-408. C. Electrical Metalfic Tubing: Provide sted electrical metallic tubing conforrring to Fed. Spec. WW -C-563. Provide UL approved raintight fittings for box connectors and conduit couplings. Set screw or indenter type fittings will not be approved. D. Flexible Metallic Conduit:- Provide flexile conduit, zinc -coated, single strip type, UL approved. Use American Bruss "Sealtite* or approved equal, flexible, liquid -tight conduit in damp or wet locations. E Surface Metal Raceways: Provide a two-piece steel raceway, complete with fittings, manufactured by the Viremold Company, or approved equal. Provide raceway size required for the number of conductors, or as specified on the drawings. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Provide conduit fittings as described below. Catalog numbers shown are Appleton Electric Company. Steel City and Raco are equally acceptable. 1. EMT couprings: 6000S Series 2. EMT connectom: 7000S Series 3. Insulating bushings (1 1/4' and larger): BEILI Series 4. Flexible conduit straight box connectors: 728 Series 5. Flexible conduit angle box connectors. 738 Series 6. Searing gland assembly- O-Z/Gedney Type FSK 7. Expansion joints. O-Z/Gedney Type AX or TX With boncring jumpers and clamps 8. Expansion and deflection fittings: O-Z/Gedney Type DX 9. Cast metal conduit fittings. Crouse-Hiinds `C�ndulets* 2.03 BUILDING WIRE A. Provide copper conductors with insulation rated for 60OV, conforming to Fed. Spec. J -C-30. B. Unless otherwise specified, provide surd Type THWN or THHN for all conductors 10 AWG and smaller. C. Unless otherwise specified, provide stranded Type THN, THWN or THHN for all conductors 8 AWG and larger. D. Provide Type THHN (90 degree C, dry locations) for branch circuit conductors in fixtures UL approved for end to end assembly and in recessed or surface mounted fixtures. Conform with the National Electrical Code for fixture wiring and specifically to the temperature of the enclosure and to the wet or dry location. E Feeders, Branch Circuits and Control Circuits: Provide 12 AWG Winimurn branch circuit wire size. Provide 14 AWG control circuits, unless otherwise specified or required by branch circuit protection. F. Low Voltage Lighting or Control Wiring: Provide minimum 18 AWG, Type TFF, thermoplastic insulated cable for each conductor. Voltage rating of cable shall be suitable for either a Class I or Class 11, remote control or signal circuit, as determined by the NEC and the actual installation. 2.04 CABLE A. Armored Cable �ype AC): Provide armored cable With copper conductors, thermoplastic insulation. 600 volt insulation voltage rating, 75 degree C insulation temperature rating, interlocking steel strip armor, and grounding conductor. The armor is not permitted to be utilized as the equipment grounding conductor. No exceptions. B. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC): Provide metal clad cable with copper conductors, thermoplastic insulation, 600 volt insulation voltage rating, 75 degree C insulation temperature rating, interlocking steel or aluminum metal tape armor, and grounding conductor. The armor is not permitted to be utilized as the equipment groundiing conductor. No exceptions. 2.05 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide outlet boxes as described below. Catalog numbers shown are Appleton Electric Company. Steel City and Raco are equally acceptable. 1. Concealed lighting boxes: 140-3/4 2. Concrete lighting boxes: OCR Series 3. Exposed righting boxes: 14S-3/4 or J40-3/4 4. Flush switch, receptacle, telephone and junction boxes: #4S-3/4 or 1225 where separate extension or plasta ring cannot be used 5. Exposed switch, receptacle. telephone and junction boxes: FS Series 1 6. Switch and telephone boxes concealed in narTow mulliorw. Bell Electric Co. 147. #448, or 1449 B. Where space is rimited, I 4CS-3/4 handy boxes may be used for switch, receptacle and telephone outlets With specific approval only. C. Provide extension and drywall rings as required. D. Size outlet boxes in accordance With the allowable fill permitted by the National Electrical Code. 2.06 PULL BOXES A. Provide code gage galvanized sheet metal sized as per National Electrical Code or as shown on the drawings. Provide retnovable cover on the largest access side of the box unless otherwise detailed. Where cost boxes are specified, provide conduit entrances With threaded hubs. Provide stainless steel screws in all extedor locations and in wet or damp locations. 2.07 SWITCHES A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are Leviton, Equal devices manufactured by Cooper Viring Devices, Pass and Seymour/Legrand, Bryant Electric, and Hubbell are acceptable. B. Provide all devices of same manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. C. Deice colors shall be coordinated With the Architect. D. Provide flush tumbler switches conformilng to Fed. Spec. W -S -896c, 20 amp, industrial grade, quiet type, 120-277V switch rating with UL approval for tungsten [amp bads or inductive bads, wiftiout derating. Provide switches as follow. DECORA STYLF, 20 AMP. 1. Single pole: 2. Single pole locking: 2.08 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are LeAm. Equal devices manufactured by WattStopper and Sensor Switch am acceptable. B. Provide or devices of some manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. C. Device colors shall be coordinated with the ArchiRect. D. All occupancy sensors shall be suitable for the geometrical and environmental chameWatics of the associated space shall be suitable for the minimum floor area to be covered, shall be the proper voltage, and shall carry a load rating greater than the bad controlled for the opropriate load type. Provide occupancy sensors as follows: 1. Wall -Switch: DECORA STYLE 2. Ceiling Mount- OSC Series for urfds requiring power packs, ODC Series for self-contained units. 2.09 RECEPTACLES A. Provide devices as indicated. Catalog numbers shown are Leviton. Equal devices manufactured by Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass and Seymour/Legrand. Bryant Electric, and Hubbell are acceptable. B. Provide all devices of same manufacturer, unless indicated otheWm C. Device colors shall be coordinated with the Architect. D. Provide grounding type receptacles conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-596, With the ground connection made through an extra pole. Provide receptacles as follow. DEC= STYI& 20 AMP. 1. Standard Simplex: 2. Standard Duplex: 3. Standard GFCI: E Receptacles denoted "W shall be provided With neoprene gasketed coverplates and #5977 -CL raintight whie-in-use covers. 2.10 COVERPLATES A. Provide STAINLESS STEEL coverplates WERE VISIBLE AND WHITE NYLON WHERE HIDDEN. Install blank coverplates on all boxes without devices or fixtums of some type as installed on devices in that room or area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAYS A. Install Wiring in metal raceways. B. Install raceways concealed, in general, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on the plans. C. Provide rWid conduit for raceways embedded in concrete, in outside walls, in earth, below floor slabs -on -grade, exposed to weather, in hazardous areas, in refrigerated areas, in the mechanical equipment moms, for feeders, and for exposed installations where subject to damage. Other raceways may be rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing at the Ctintructors option unless otherwise specified. D. Provide flexible conduit for all motors, transformer and equipment connections subject to vibration. E. Continuity: Provide continuous metallic raceways from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Enter and secure conduit to all boxes, to provide electrical continuity from the point of service to outlets. Provide locknuts and bushings on terminals of metallic conduits. F.- Size: Use raceways no smaller than 3/4 inch. except that 1/2 inch may be used for switch legs consisting of not mom than 2 wires. Control circuit Wiring specified to be 14 ANG wire may utilize 1/2 inch raceway or larger as required. G. Raceways in Earth: Point metalric raceways buried and beneath slob -on - grade with one heavy continuous coat of asphalt varnish ofter assembly of conduit and fittings. H. Exposed Raceways: Run exposed raceways in straight lines at right angles or parallel with walls, beams or columns. 1. Raceways in Plaiin Concrete: Do not Mace raceways in Main concrete, such as cement toppings on structural floors, without special approval. Install, however, in non -reinforced concrete headers provided for their installation. J. Raceways Through Roof- Where raceways penetrate the roof seal, provide suitable pitch pockets or lead flashing. Submit shop drawings or method to be used, for approval. K. Raceways Entering the Building Below Grade: Provide raceways with galvanized cast-iron wall entrance seals, having a watertight sealing gland assembly. L Raceways in Furred Spaces. Install raceways in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Do not anchor or strap conduits to the ceiling furring channels or attach to furred ceiling hanger wires Without the Architect's written approval. M. Straps and Hangers: Substantially support raceways by straps, suitable damps or hangers, to provide a rigid installation. Perforated strup, hangers and twisted Wire attachments Will not be acceptable. Do not support or fasten raceways to other pipe, or in a manner to prevent the ready removal of other pipe. N. Joints and Connections- Make watertight all couprings and thnxided connections in threaded conduit Cut all joints square, mom smooth, and property thread. Fit all box connections With a minimum of two nripmM Inek aids and one steel, plastic or fiber hushirk3 form;nq an approved tight bond With box. Provide locknuts both inside and outside of the enclimm to which the conduit is alladied. Use raintight compression type fittings for electrical metallic tubing systems and use at least one lodmut on the inside of each enclosure entry. Provide grounding locknuts or bushilngs where required in Section 162DO 3 -OZ 'Grounding. - 0. Stub Ups: Extend rVid steel conduit stubs at least one foot above slab or MI. before connection is made to electrical metallic tubing. P. Threads: Clean all threads of rigid conduit. Coat all mate threads of all steel conduid installed underground or in or under concrete slab with red or while lead immediately before being coupled together. Q. Running Threads: Use "Dickson* or approved equal couplings in lieu of running threads. R. Protection: Cap raceways stubbed up, including those in cabinets. immedia* upon their installation. The use of paper or rag wads will not be perWtted. S. Expansion Joints- Provide raceways crossing expansion joints with 0- Z/Gedney Type AX fitting with Type A) bonding jumper for rigid conduit and Type TX fitting With Type TJ bonding jumper for electric metallic , tubing. Where differential settlement may occur, use Type DX fittings. T. Exterior Conduits: Install raceways containing electric service cables not less than 36 inches below finished grade. U. General Location Requirements: Use care in locating raceways in close proximity to heating duct, sleam and hot water fines. Where such crossings are unavoidable, clear covering of line by at least 6 inches. Ali raceway runs shown are diagrammatic. Determine exact locations in the field except where dimensions am specified on the drawings. 3.02 OUTLET BOXES AND PULL BOXES A. Rigidly mount all boxes and provide With suitable screw fastened covers. Plug open knock -outs or holes in boxes with suitable Wanking devices. B. Install pull boxes in locations that will be accessible after completion of the building. Provide pull boxes or junction boxes to firnit conduit runs to 125 feet and to limik angles to the equivalent of 270 degrees. Additional pull boxes may be provided to facilitate vim putting. 3.03 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors continuous from outlet to outlet and splice only at outlet or junction boxes. B. Circuiting: Circuit all feeders and branch circuits as shown on the plans. Approval of the Architect is required for deviations from the plans. C. Solices and Terminations 1. Provide electrically and mechanically secure splices, tops, lug connections, etc. 2. Utilize solderless connectom designed for only one combination of conductors when making splices or taps in conductors 8 AWG or larger. 3. Utilize pre -insulated connectors equal to 3M Company "Scotchlok! electrical song connectors or Ideal Industries Inc. 'Wing -Nut" for splices and tops in conductors 10 AWG and smaller. These connectors must also be provided for factory -made splices in fixtures or equipment. Obtain kch&ecfs approval prior to using any other twist -on connectors. 4. Leave sufficient stock cable at all sprices and terminations, boxes, etc., to insure conductors at the bushing are not Winding. 5. Pressure indent type connectors must be submitted to the Architect for approval. 6. Provide all power and control conductors, that terminate on equipment or terminal strips, with solderiess lugs or fork and flanged tongue terminals. Provide tongue terminal equal to Thomas & Betts "Sta-Kon. The above type of conductor ternimation is not required when the equipment is provided with solderless connectors. 7. Tape joints with vinyl plastic tape as manufactured by 3M Company, or an approved equal. Use sufficient tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined. B. Keep splices in underground junction boxes, handholes, and manholes to an absolute minilmum. Where splices are necessary, use resin pressure sprom and resin spriding kits manufactured by 3M Company to totally encapsulate the sprice. D. Wire sizes shown are minimum based on code requiremients, voltage drop and/or other considerations. E Sizes of wires and cabin indicated or specified am American Wire Gage (Brawn and Sharpe). F. Armored cable (Type Ad) may be substituted for win and conduit systems at the Electrical Contriactor's option, only where approved by Iocd and national codes and amendments. G. Metal clad (Type MC) cable may be substituted for Vim and conduit systems at the Electrical Conliacicir's option, only where approved by local and national codes and amendments. 3.04 LUBRICATION A. Where lubrication is required for putting cables, use a compound specifically prepared for cable pulling. 3.05 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION (UNDER 600 VOLTS) A. Identify phase, circuit, and voltage at each panel, pull box. jundion box and switch. Provide waterproof non-metallic bonds or identification togs for each conductor. B. Color code all conductors With Insulation colored as follows: PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this secUon of the work are specified in Section 16000, *General Provisions.0 The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The electrical service to the building is as indicated on the drawings. 1.03 GROUNDING A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' B. Ground the electrical system completely and effectively, as required by the National Electrical Code and as specified hereinafter. C. Provide all ground systems and make connections mechanically secure and electrically continuous. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EIECTRICAL SEINCE A. Arrange With the servicing utilities and pay all costs and fees for services indicated on the drawings. All work shall be in accordance With serving company's standards and subject to their approval. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Raceways: Install metallic raceways mechaniedly and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment Bond all metallic raceways together, with a ground conjuctor, and connect to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide separate green equipment grounding conductor for all electrical raceways, to effectively ground all panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior righting standards, and non-current carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, busses, etc., for this purpom Connect the equipment ground to the buViing system ground. Use the some size equipment grounifing conductors as phase conductors, up through 8 AWG. See drawings for conductor size with phase conductors 6 AWG and larger. C. Receptacles: Permanently connect the ground tertnimal on each receptacle to the green ground conductor. D. Ductwork: Provide a fleodble ground drop, 6 AWG equivalent at each flexible duct connection at each air handier, exhaust fan, and supply fan, and install to preclude vibration. E Motors. Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a baked soldedess lug. Botts, screws and washers shall be bronze or cadmium Mated steel. 3.03 TESTS A. Provide the tests as outrined hereinafter and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each system. 3.04 FINAL TESTS A. Start final tests after the work described in these specifications has been completely installed in accordance with the true spirit and intent of these specifications and after complete preliminary tests have been made which indicate adequacy, quality, completion and satisfactory operation. These final tests am comprised of the following: 1. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each panelboard and switchboard in the project. Where the equipment manufacturer includes an Electrical Test Report With the equipment the manufacturer's report outline shall be used. 2. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each motor 1/2 horsepower and larger. Where the equipment manufacturer includes a Motor Test Report With the equipment, the monufacturer's report outrine shall be used. B. The Contractor shall submit the above completed 'Reportso to the Architect in dupficate, noUng all deviations from requirements limted below. 1. Plus or minus 5 percent nominal system voltage and no-load voltage, or a plus or minus 5 percent between no bad and full bad voltage. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent variation between rated and actual motor current. 3. Plus or mimus 10 percent variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents. The Contractor shall balance phase currents of all distributbri equipment, wiWin the tolerances mentioned above. 4. Insulation resistance between conductors and ground less than 1,000,000 ohms, unless permirtled by NEC. 3.05 FINAL CORRECTIONS A. Correct promptly arry failure or defects revealed by these tests as determined by the Architect. Reconduct tests on these corrected items as directed by the ArchilecL EW OF SIMMI 1=0 SEM I REMIM DIS11111IRM SVSFFH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PANEWDS, CABINETS AND SAFETY SWITCHES A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions! The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 160DO, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extiint required by the references thereto. B. Provide all panel boards and cabinets inducring breakers, bus bars, hinged door, lock trim, and all appurtenances for a complete and satisfactory instalkition. C. Provide all fused switches and non-fused safety switches for circtil: protection and disconnect proposes. D. Square 'D' equipment is mentioned herein to establish quality and general requirements. Comparable equipment manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, or Eaton/Cutler-Hammer may be submitted for approval during shop drawing period. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. WiWin thirty days after award of contract furnish the architect five shop drawiing portfolios (bound caries) containiing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all distribution equipment to be used on this project. In these portforicis use manufacturer's specification sheets, Identified by equipment name, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picture, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Voltages. 3. Ampacitles. 4. Fault current ratings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANE1BOARDS (24W CLASS) A. Provide Square 'D` Comparry Type NOOD dead front panelboard With bolt - on circuit breakers. Provide minimum box dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5 3/4 inches deep. Provide minimum 5 inch top and bottom gutter, not including ground bus space, and 6 inch minimum side gutters. All pointed parts shall be pointed with the manufacturer's standard color baked enamel over a phosphate pretreated surface. Rate panelboord for a minimum of 10,000 amps, symmetrical interrupting capacity. B. Provide 100% capacity aluminum or copper phase busses and neutral bus. Provide 100% capacity copper ground bus. C. Provide copper insulated isolated ground bus for ponelboords serving isolated ground loads. D. Provide zinc -coated sheet steel cabinet conforrWing to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. Except when boated outdoors, provide NEMA 1 enclosure. I- Provide trims with adjustable trim clamps. FA trims With hinged doors having combination, lock and latch. Provide hardware on flush doors and trims, with all beads or similar projections on the inside. When installed, the trim arid door must present a smooth, flush appearance. Provide disc tumbler locks, all keyed alike. F. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic cover and metal frame on the inside of each door. Mount a typewrittm directory, properly identifying each eircuit, under the dear plastic cover. G. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background dearly indicating the name of the panelboard. H. Provide split -bus, sub -feed lugs, feed -through lugs, sub -feed protectivii devices and contadom, if any, as indicated on the drawings or specified in this or other sections of these specifications. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide for panelboard use, molded plastic case, air circuit breakers conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-375. B. Provide breakers with thiernrid magnetic trip units, and a common trip bar for two- or three -pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip oil poles of each breaker. C. Pro" breakers of the trip-fme and trip -indicating boft-on type, with quick -make, quick -break contacts. Provide single two- or thme- pole breaker interchangeability. D. Provide interchangeable rating Mugs/trip units for circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger. E Provide solid-state molded case circuit breakers with electronic writing, timmg and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings for circuit breakers with frame sizes 1200 amperes and larger. Provide adjustable current settings for ground fault trip and instantaneous trip, adjustable pickup, and ground fault sensing integral With circuit breaker. F. Provide RACR rated circuit breakers for circuit breakers that serve heating, ventilation or &-conditioning equipment. G. Provide shunt trip cogs where required. H. Provide Class A ground fault circuit interrupting type circuit breakers where required. 1. In jurisdictioris that have adopted the 2008 (or subsequent) version of the National Electrical Code, provide handle ties for all single pole circuit breakers that serve circuits comprising a mulllwire branch circuit to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors in the multiwire branch circuit. J. Tandem or buff -sized circuit breakers am not permitted. 2.03 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide NEMA Type HD safety switches With quick -make, quick -break mechanism. 'Bonderize or approved equal, prime and finlish all enclosures to resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance. Intedock cover with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the 'offo position. NEMA 1 enclosure is standard except as noted or required. Provide NEMA 31? enclosures for sviitches exposed to the weather except where noted otherwise. B. Provide appropriate fuse crips for safety switches that am incricated to be fused. C. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background clearly indicating the name of the load served. 2.04 FUSES A. For mains and feeders rated at 600 amps or less, provide Bussmann current rimiting time delay Class RKI fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RMS. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferruz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the same manufacturer. B. For maiins and feeders rated at more than 600 amps, provide Bussmann Class L time delay fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RM& Equivalent fuses manufactured by Litteffuse or Fwaz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. C. For motor protection, provide Bussmiann Class RKI time delay or Class L time delay fuses. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferraz Shawmut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. 2.05 AUXILIARY SYSTEM CABINETS A. Provide zinc -coated sheet "I cabinet conforming to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. . Provide a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturers standard color on trim and doors. Except where specified otherwise, provide NEMA I enclosure. B. Provide cabinets With interior dimensions not less than those inifficated on the drawings. Each trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush catch. Provide flush hardware on all flush doors and trims With all beads or similar projections, on the inside. When installed, the trim and door must present a smooth. flush appearance. C. Size doors to provide maximum size openings to the box interiom Provide boxes With a 3/4 inch weatherproof grade plywood buckboard having a two -coat insulating varnish finish, for telephone termination and where shown. Coordinate size with Telephone Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORT A. Property align distribution equipment and adequately support independent of the connecting raceways. Provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the support of the equipment. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Where distribution equipment is installed during construction, Mace temporary covers over the openings at all times, except when work is Wing performed therein. 3.03 INSULATION A. Where distribution equipment is flush mounted in an outside wall. insulate the back and am of cabinet With 1/2 inch rigiid fiberglass insulation. 3.04 FUSES A. Provide fuses at all locations shown on the drawings or required for supplemental protection. B. Deriver to the Owner at the time of final inspection, one spare set of 3 fuses for each type, size and voltage installed. C. Provide instruction label for all fuses installed, indicating fuse type, size and description. 3.05 PHASE BALANCE A. Balance all phase loads to Within 10 percent END OF SEEM 10300 PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisiion&" The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Ptovisions,' form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The luminaim catalog numbers listed on the drawling indicate manufacturer, lumimaire design, appearance, etc., desired. These lueindires shall be modified, if necessary, to comMy with the subsequent specification. C. Provide, complete in all respects, all luminaires shown on the drawiings. Where 8 foot lurnimaires are shown on the drawings and a 4 foot lurninaire scheduled, furnish tandem 4 foot luminaires or two 4 foot individual units. Luminaires specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of luminaires of other manufacturers. The sole and final judgment of substitutions lies With the Architect. D. All luminaires must bear the Underwriters Laboratories label. E All luminaire component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages. The shipment from the luminaire manufacturer shall include integrally mounted and/or remote mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the luminaire lamps. F. If luminaires specified herein are discontinued after the contract for the work is executed, provide suitable substitute luminaires, Without additional cost as directed by the ArchitecL G. Accept all responsibility for coordination of substituted luminaires with the balance of the building construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contract fumish the architect five shop drawling portforms (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and candlepower distribution curves of all luminaires to be used on this project. In these portfolios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on lumindire schedule, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picittim, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Coefficients of utilirzation by an approved testing laboratory. 3. Candlepower distribution by an approved testing laboratory. 4. Lumindire brightness by an approved testing laboratory. 5. Fusing and type of ballast provided. 6. Certification of plastic materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires 1. Lumindires shall be constructed of steel, rust protected With a five -stage metal prefinishing process, and finished with baked white enamel of the acrylic base or alkyd base type. The entire luminaire shall be finished in this manner except where non- fermus reflecting surfaces or louvem are specified. 2. Luminaires shall be designed for maximum heat dissipation so that under operating conditions of a 90 degrees F. ambient raw temperature, the ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 3. Reflector glass shall be 30 percent minimum measured in accordance with ASTM Method D -523-53T (60 degrees). 4. Provide a reflectance of 85 percent rnmimum on all surfaces measured with an integrating sphere -type reffectometer. 5. Where the luminaires specified require the use of plastic lenses, materials of the highest quarAy conforming to the following requirements: a. Use 100 percent virgin acryllic thermoplastic. b. All raw material used must be of a quality to exceed IES -SPI - NEVA specifications by at least 100 percent This will permit a maximum of 3 units of yellowling factor with 2,000 hours of exposure in a fade -o -meter. The lumindire manufacturer shall fumish a guarantee that 3 units of yellowing will not be exceeded after 15 years of luminuire use, on a 10 -hour day, 7 -day week basis. B. Ballasts 1. Ballasts shall be Motorola Electronic ballasts, or approved equal. Ballasts shall be rapid start and operate at a frequency of 25 KHz, or higher. Ballasts shall have a minimum power factor of .99 and shall not exceed 10% THD. Balkists shall bear the UL label, Class P. 2. Ballasts shall be securely mounted Within luminaires to eliminate vitirution noise and to provide adequate heat transfer. 3. Ballosts operaUng 4,30 mliliamp lamps shall have a sound rating of W. C. Emergency Ballasts I. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a Wininum of 1100 lumens and capable of supporting two kimps. 2. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing compact D. Lamps fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a rifinimum of 950 lumens. 1. Provide energy saving 78 'Octron* lamps as manufactured by Sylvaniia and as scheduled on the drawings. TWirly-two wait mod start 4100 degree lamps shall have an initial rating of 2900 lumens. 2. Fumish all fluorescent lamps mode by the some lamp manufacturer in order to match color phosphors. 3. Provide low mercury content type fluorescent lamps. 4. *Bum -in' all fluorescent lamps controlled by dimmers for a Winimurn of 100 hours prior to placing in dimmed luminaire. 2.02 INCANDESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Lumindires- Provide incandescent luminaires that hove been designed for a maximum temperature of 90 degrees C at the point of contact With the ceiling. B. Lamps: Provide 120 volt lamps, unless noted otherviiise, conforming to Federal Specification WL -101. Provide frosted or clear bulb, shape (A19, A23, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories including drywall frames. sterns, canoiMes, cords, toggle bofts, etc., necessary to mount the luminaire in a proper and approved method. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware, trim rings, etc. for the type of ceiling specified. Coordinate Wdi the architectural room finiish schedule. C. Provide all necessary track hardware. fittings, connectors, pendant feeds, end caps, etc. for complete track righting systems. D. Provide all necessary low voltage transformers, connectors, mounting clamps, etc. for complete low voltage righting systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Where luminaires am indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on 1 -1/2 -inch ceiling spacer% unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiring material. 3.02 STANDARD DRYWALL FRAMES A. Provide aluminum drywall frames for all recessed luminaires installed in inaccessible ceilings unless otherwise approved by the Architect. Provide drywall frame designed and fabricated of such material to preclude the possibility of rust staining drywall. 3.03 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Property support and align luminaires and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the luminaires. Coordinate complete luminaire installation With the building construction. Clean and lamp all lurnimaires With new lamps immediately prior to final inspedion. B. Provide all required nisrric bracing for luminaires utirized on projects located in seismiii; zones. C. Square and rectangular luminaires shall be mounted With sides parallel to building lines. and parallel with ceiling lines. D. Install fluorescent lurniinaires as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal arignment, preventing horizontal or verUcal deflection or angular jointing of luminaires suspended in continuous rows. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaire Wes and accessories prior to ordering luminaires. Coordinate and cooperate With ceiling supplier in the preparation of ceMing shop drawings. B. Verify thickness of ceiling systems and provide extensimns as required for all downlights. C. Verify luminaim dimensions and coordinate with the available wall and/or ceiring space prior to ordering. END OF SM= 16= PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in SecUon 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, *General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contruct fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all control equipment to be used on this project. In these portfolios use manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by equipment name. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCKS A. Digital Tirneclocks 1. As indicated on the draviiings. Provide digital 7 -day timeclock with LCD display. 99 set points per week, manual override, autornatic daylight savings adjustment automatic leap year compensation, permanent schedule retention, and power outage backup. Provide Tork DW series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songarno and Intermatic are equally acceptable. B. Electromechancial Timedocks 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide electromechanical 7 -day timeclock, capable of a different program each day of the week. Provide contacts rated 40 amps per pole, voltage indicated on the drawings, and reserve power supply. Provide Tork W series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songamo and Intermatic are equally acceptable. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Electrically Held 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide Square 'D' Ckiss 8903, Type L fighting contoctor. Equivalent contactors manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, and Eabn/Cutler-Hammer am equally acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance With manufacturees instructions. B. Install individual controls, contoctors, relays and time -delay relays in enclosures dimctly adjacent to the ponelboard serving the circuits controlled. C. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 16300. D. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. E Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays and controls as required to switch the bads in the manner indicated on the drawings whether such independent components are specifically indicated or not. F. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supMy and inform Engineer of arry deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. END OF SEM 1I%V PARTI GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outrined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The Contractor shall fumish all labor and material necessary for the proper installation and testing of the fire alarm system for this building. The fire alarm system shall be connected to the smoke detectors, audio/visual indicators and the smoke detectors in the return ductwork of the rooftop units. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the current NFPA Standards 72, the local Fire Code, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall bear the Underwriteri' LabomWw label and be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) aft receiving approval from the local Fire Marshal. Submit all information required for Man review and permitting by authorities having jurisifliction, inducting but not rimited to equipment cut sheets, floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Equipment: Shall be of the some manufacturer as the exiiiting system and fully compatible with the existing system. B. Fire Alarm Equipment- Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design producL products of the following are acceptable: 1. Gamewell-FCI 2. Fire -Lite Alarms 3. Notifier 4. Silent Knight 5. Siemens Building Technologies. Inc. 6. SimplexGrinnell 8. Substitutions: The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications and all requirements of the project as listed or shown on the drawings. The contractor accepts all responsilmlity for costs and coordination Issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. C. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances 1. Provide inlitiating devices made the same manufacturer as the control unils. I Provide all notfficatkin appriances made by the some manufacturer. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: 1. Provide all components necessary for jurisdictional approval, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises. Entire building area(s) as indicated on the drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict order of precedence of requirements is as listed. Always comply with the most stringent requimment of each of the following: a. The Americans With DisaWilies Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshall. c. The requirements of the'local authority having jurisdiction. d. Apprmble local codes. e. NFPA 72; where the word *shoukl! is used, consideir that provision mandatory, where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. f. The contruct documents (drawings and specifications) unless those documents exceed the requirements listed in the above standards, in which case the contract documents shall take precederim 4. Evacuation Alarm: Single or Multiple smoke zones; allow for evomation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. Program zones as indicated on the drawings, subject to the approval of the local rim Marshall. 5. Voice Notification: Where indicated with speaker symbology or if required by code, provide emergency voice alarm communications With multichannel capability, (roal. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone untess otherwise indicated, with alarm notifution in the alarm zone and other adjacent zones as ifictated by the authority having jurisdiction. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by the local Fire Marshall. 8. Hearing Impaired Occupants. Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units. 9. Combined Systernin Do not combine fire alarm system With other non -fire systems. j B. Superviding Stations and Fire, Department Connections: 1. bdsUng to remain. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class % Slyle A. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources-. 1. Existing to remain. 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance With NFPA 72. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance With NFPA 72. D. WAC 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers as incfioated; shut down air moving fans on all units rated 2,000 ch or greater or as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 CONVENTIONAL CONTROL PANELS A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall -mounted enclosure. 8. Power supply. Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciatom door holders, smoke dampers, and relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supMy With capacity for operating systern in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 rninutes. C. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. D. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. E. Indicating Appliance Circuits. Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. F. Municipal Trip Circuit- Output connections for remote station transmitter. Include muniicipol trip DISCONNECT switch. G. Remote Station Signal Transmitter Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone rines to central station receiver. H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified. 1. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, arid ALARM SILENCE switch. J. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuid trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visual and audliAe trouble alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel. 3. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station. 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is crisplayed until initialing failure or circuit trouble is cleared. K. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Sound arid display local fire alarm signalling devices with signal. 2. Transmit zone -coded signal to remote station equipment 3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel, when present. 4. Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system, when present. 5. Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main floor or afterriate floor, when present 6. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and smoke damper operation, when present 7. Transmit signal to release door hold -open devices by zone, when present L Alarm Reset* System remains in alarm mode until manually reset With key-accesmble reset function; system resets only N initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. M. Lamp Test Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. N. Drift Sequence of Operation: Manual drift function causes alarm mode operation as described. 2.05 INUATING DEVICES A. Ceiling or Wall Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, and auxiliary relay contact suitable for mounting on 4 inch (102 mm) outlet box. Provide two -mire or four -wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits. B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual irxr=Uon of detecW actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide four -Wire detector with separate power supMy and signal circuits. Include remote test/reset station for each duct mounted smoke detector, including audible and visible alarm indication and reset capability. 2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Alarm Lights. NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flusher with red lettered "FIRE! on clear lens. B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 7Z flush type fire alarm horn. 1. Sound Ruling: 8`7 dB at 10 feet (3M). 2. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher. 2.07 FIRE ALARM CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit 1. Install conduit in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 2. Install all concealed, inaccessible wiring in a conduit or raceway. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or raceway. Conduit nil shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross sectional area where three or more cabin am included within a single conduiL Plenum rated cable may be used only where concealed above accessible tile ceilings or accessible shafts. 3. Separate cables from ary open conductors of Class I circuds and do not Mace in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing Ckiss 1 cables. 4. Wiring for low voltage control, alarm notification, emergency communication, and sikfillar power -limited auxiliary functions may be installed in the some conduit as initiating and signaring One circuits. Design system to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the control panel or any other component provided except where entry is specified by the manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum. B. Wire 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall comply with local, state, and national codes and as recommended by the manufacturer. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall be not less than 18 AWG for initiating device and signaling kne circuits, and 14 AWG for noltification appriance circuits. 3. All wiring and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. All field wiring shall be supervised for open eircuids, short circuits, and grounded condition C. Non -Conduit Plenum Rated Vim 1. Where permitted by local codes and authodUes, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, inducting wiring installed IrWide walls. 2. Inilkting Device and Indioating Appliance Circuits: Power rimited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor� 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handring ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. D. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits. Building Wire as specified in Section 16100. E Control Panel: Connected to a separate dedicated branch cimuit with a separate dedicated disconnect switch; circuit labeled FIRE AM. F. FIRE AM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE 1. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors With insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 2. Match existing fire alarm Wire color cocring N present If no coding system exists use the following coding system: 3. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, blue, while, green. 4. Initiating Device Circuit Black, red. 5. Detector Power Supply. Violet brown. 6. Signal Device Circuit Blue (positive), white (negative). 7. Door Hokler/Release: Gray, gray. B. Cirouit Conductors. Copper or optical fiber, provide 200 feet (60 m) extra; color code and label. G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 83 combination waveform arid NFPA 70, except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line -to -neutral, and &90 V(ac), fine -to -line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to Protect applicable equipment for 24 V(dc) maximum do clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line -to -ground, and 72 V(dc), rine-to-line. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building, rated to protect applicable equipment. H. Locks and Keys: Deriver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the some standard lock and key for each key operated switch and locliable panel and caVinet; provide 5 keys of each type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finislied areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. E. Install products in accordance With manufacturees instructions. F. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Install Wiring in conduit except as provided for accessible concealed areas. G. Where permitted by local codes and authorities, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All Wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, including Wiring installed inside walls. All Wiring installed where exposed to view shall be in conduit. H. Mount end -of -rine device in box with lost device or separate box adjacent to last device in drait. 1. Mount outlet box for electric door holder/release to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. J. Make conduit and Wiring connections to door holder/release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper swiftches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors as applicable. K. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. NoUfy authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheiluling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person With equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct perform preriminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and suppries required to accomplish inspection and testing. F Perform inspection and testing in accordance With NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work. adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire systern complies with contract documents. H. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days Without ary system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over aft correction of malfunction. I At end of successful crognostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Farm! 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maiintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output miatrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined With inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieM until inspection and testing is successful and: I. Specified diagnosUc period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. . Final acceptance of the fire alarm systern has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy pernifl: has been granted. 7. Specified pre-doseout instruction is complete. C. Perform post -occupancy instruction withiin I month after date of occupancy. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid for later acceptance, for a maintenance contract for 2 years, to include the work described below, include the total cost of contract proposal to be valk! at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having juriscrction. C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner 1. Provide on-site response Within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner Will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time, include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contruct. D. Provide a complete description of preventive momtenance, systematic examimation, adjustment cleaning, inspection, and testing, With a detailed schedule. E Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nattim of the trouble, correction performed, and parts repkiced. Subrnit duplicate of each log entry to Ownees representative upon completion of site visit. F. Comply With Owner's requirements for access to facilly and security. 1*11111`&M PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16DOO, "General Provisicim" form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Although such work is not specifically incricated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKWARDS A. Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick, UL -labeled fire - retardant, size as indicated on the drawings. Do not point over UL label. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius. 1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep With single gang plaster ring. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. Conduit- As specified in Section 16100. Provide pull cords in all conduit. Use 3/4 inch conduit minimum. B. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC -40 conduit. Use ekDnded- sweep bends as necessary to accommodate the serving utiliVs REVIEWED requirements and to permit the installation of cables inducting any necessary heads and terminations where applicable. COMPLIANCI NFPA 70 -1 PAI?T 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BACKWARDS JAN 2 A. Provide 6 AWG grounding conductor to the power system's grounding electrode systern. iV of Tukl 3.02 PATHWAYS BUILDING DIN A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade. Encase in at least 3 inch thick concrete for ot least 60 inches out from the building rine. B. Install With the folloveing minimum clearances: 1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters. transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power system. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and ponelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit RECEIVED 1. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a siinfilITY OF TUMILP horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially i installed. DEC 2 9 2016 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceifings, and floors except where specifically incricated to be exposed. PERFAIT CENTER a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as I exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel With or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structurol members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder. Seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70. E Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penistrations through fire - rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 160DO. WA ECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 30 )0 00 W-1-017 . -0 � .00 i ori a rl- i 0 0 00 L 0 r 0 0 00 00 Ir - 00 (3) Z 0 0 Z :D r) rr W rl Z CC C/) Ir - LO CY) DEC.20.201 BY:SM JOB:#16.02 120/208V 120/240V 277/48W Phase A Block Block Brown Phase B Red Orange Yellow phase C Blue Blue Purple Neutral Wits White Grey Equipment Ground Green Green Green C. Colored non -aging, plastic tape may be used to color feeder conductors. Color code all control wire insulation and tog at each sprice and termination. PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this secUon of the work are specified in Section 16000, *General Provisions.0 The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The electrical service to the building is as indicated on the drawings. 1.03 GROUNDING A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' B. Ground the electrical system completely and effectively, as required by the National Electrical Code and as specified hereinafter. C. Provide all ground systems and make connections mechanically secure and electrically continuous. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EIECTRICAL SEINCE A. Arrange With the servicing utilities and pay all costs and fees for services indicated on the drawings. All work shall be in accordance With serving company's standards and subject to their approval. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Raceways: Install metallic raceways mechaniedly and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment Bond all metallic raceways together, with a ground conjuctor, and connect to a direct ground at the point of electrical service entrance. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide separate green equipment grounding conductor for all electrical raceways, to effectively ground all panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior righting standards, and non-current carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, busses, etc., for this purpom Connect the equipment ground to the buViing system ground. Use the some size equipment grounifing conductors as phase conductors, up through 8 AWG. See drawings for conductor size with phase conductors 6 AWG and larger. C. Receptacles: Permanently connect the ground tertnimal on each receptacle to the green ground conductor. D. Ductwork: Provide a fleodble ground drop, 6 AWG equivalent at each flexible duct connection at each air handier, exhaust fan, and supply fan, and install to preclude vibration. E Motors. Connect the ground conductor to the conduit with an approved grounding bushing, and to the metal frame with a baked soldedess lug. Botts, screws and washers shall be bronze or cadmium Mated steel. 3.03 TESTS A. Provide the tests as outrined hereinafter and other tests necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status and suitable operation of each system. 3.04 FINAL TESTS A. Start final tests after the work described in these specifications has been completely installed in accordance with the true spirit and intent of these specifications and after complete preliminary tests have been made which indicate adequacy, quality, completion and satisfactory operation. These final tests am comprised of the following: 1. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each panelboard and switchboard in the project. Where the equipment manufacturer includes an Electrical Test Report With the equipment the manufacturer's report outline shall be used. 2. Provide an organized report in sufficient quantity to provide the indicated information for each motor 1/2 horsepower and larger. Where the equipment manufacturer includes a Motor Test Report With the equipment, the monufacturer's report outrine shall be used. B. The Contractor shall submit the above completed 'Reportso to the Architect in dupficate, noUng all deviations from requirements limted below. 1. Plus or minus 5 percent nominal system voltage and no-load voltage, or a plus or minus 5 percent between no bad and full bad voltage. 2. Plus or minus 5 percent variation between rated and actual motor current. 3. Plus or mimus 10 percent variation between average phase current and measured individual phase currents. The Contractor shall balance phase currents of all distributbri equipment, wiWin the tolerances mentioned above. 4. Insulation resistance between conductors and ground less than 1,000,000 ohms, unless permirtled by NEC. 3.05 FINAL CORRECTIONS A. Correct promptly arry failure or defects revealed by these tests as determined by the Architect. Reconduct tests on these corrected items as directed by the ArchilecL EW OF SIMMI 1=0 SEM I REMIM DIS11111IRM SVSFFH PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PANEWDS, CABINETS AND SAFETY SWITCHES A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions! The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 160DO, 'General Provisions,* form a part of this specification to the extiint required by the references thereto. B. Provide all panel boards and cabinets inducring breakers, bus bars, hinged door, lock trim, and all appurtenances for a complete and satisfactory instalkition. C. Provide all fused switches and non-fused safety switches for circtil: protection and disconnect proposes. D. Square 'D' equipment is mentioned herein to establish quality and general requirements. Comparable equipment manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, or Eaton/Cutler-Hammer may be submitted for approval during shop drawing period. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. WiWin thirty days after award of contract furnish the architect five shop drawiing portfolios (bound caries) containiing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all distribution equipment to be used on this project. In these portforicis use manufacturer's specification sheets, Identified by equipment name, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picture, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Voltages. 3. Ampacitles. 4. Fault current ratings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANE1BOARDS (24W CLASS) A. Provide Square 'D` Comparry Type NOOD dead front panelboard With bolt - on circuit breakers. Provide minimum box dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5 3/4 inches deep. Provide minimum 5 inch top and bottom gutter, not including ground bus space, and 6 inch minimum side gutters. All pointed parts shall be pointed with the manufacturer's standard color baked enamel over a phosphate pretreated surface. Rate panelboord for a minimum of 10,000 amps, symmetrical interrupting capacity. B. Provide 100% capacity aluminum or copper phase busses and neutral bus. Provide 100% capacity copper ground bus. C. Provide copper insulated isolated ground bus for ponelboords serving isolated ground loads. D. Provide zinc -coated sheet steel cabinet conforrWing to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. Except when boated outdoors, provide NEMA 1 enclosure. I- Provide trims with adjustable trim clamps. FA trims With hinged doors having combination, lock and latch. Provide hardware on flush doors and trims, with all beads or similar projections on the inside. When installed, the trim arid door must present a smooth, flush appearance. Provide disc tumbler locks, all keyed alike. F. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic cover and metal frame on the inside of each door. Mount a typewrittm directory, properly identifying each eircuit, under the dear plastic cover. G. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background dearly indicating the name of the panelboard. H. Provide split -bus, sub -feed lugs, feed -through lugs, sub -feed protectivii devices and contadom, if any, as indicated on the drawings or specified in this or other sections of these specifications. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide for panelboard use, molded plastic case, air circuit breakers conforming to Fed. Spec. W -C-375. B. Provide breakers with thiernrid magnetic trip units, and a common trip bar for two- or three -pole breakers, connected internally to each pole so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip oil poles of each breaker. C. Pro" breakers of the trip-fme and trip -indicating boft-on type, with quick -make, quick -break contacts. Provide single two- or thme- pole breaker interchangeability. D. Provide interchangeable rating Mugs/trip units for circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger. E Provide solid-state molded case circuit breakers with electronic writing, timmg and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings for circuit breakers with frame sizes 1200 amperes and larger. Provide adjustable current settings for ground fault trip and instantaneous trip, adjustable pickup, and ground fault sensing integral With circuit breaker. F. Provide RACR rated circuit breakers for circuit breakers that serve heating, ventilation or &-conditioning equipment. G. Provide shunt trip cogs where required. H. Provide Class A ground fault circuit interrupting type circuit breakers where required. 1. In jurisdictioris that have adopted the 2008 (or subsequent) version of the National Electrical Code, provide handle ties for all single pole circuit breakers that serve circuits comprising a mulllwire branch circuit to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors in the multiwire branch circuit. J. Tandem or buff -sized circuit breakers am not permitted. 2.03 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide NEMA Type HD safety switches With quick -make, quick -break mechanism. 'Bonderize or approved equal, prime and finlish all enclosures to resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance. Intedock cover with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in the 'offo position. NEMA 1 enclosure is standard except as noted or required. Provide NEMA 31? enclosures for sviitches exposed to the weather except where noted otherwise. B. Provide appropriate fuse crips for safety switches that am incricated to be fused. C. Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic adhesive nameplate with 1/4 inch high black letters on a white background clearly indicating the name of the load served. 2.04 FUSES A. For mains and feeders rated at 600 amps or less, provide Bussmann current rimiting time delay Class RKI fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RMS. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferruz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the same manufacturer. B. For maiins and feeders rated at more than 600 amps, provide Bussmann Class L time delay fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000 amp RM& Equivalent fuses manufactured by Litteffuse or Fwaz Shammut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. C. For motor protection, provide Bussmiann Class RKI time delay or Class L time delay fuses. Equivalent fuses manufactured by Littelfuse or Ferraz Shawmut are acceptable. All fuses shall be by the some manufacturer. 2.05 AUXILIARY SYSTEM CABINETS A. Provide zinc -coated sheet "I cabinet conforming to the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., bearing their inspection label. . Provide a suitable primer coat and finish coat of the manufacturers standard color on trim and doors. Except where specified otherwise, provide NEMA I enclosure. B. Provide cabinets With interior dimensions not less than those inifficated on the drawings. Each trim shall be fitted with hinged door and flush catch. Provide flush hardware on all flush doors and trims With all beads or similar projections, on the inside. When installed, the trim and door must present a smooth. flush appearance. C. Size doors to provide maximum size openings to the box interiom Provide boxes With a 3/4 inch weatherproof grade plywood buckboard having a two -coat insulating varnish finish, for telephone termination and where shown. Coordinate size with Telephone Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORT A. Property align distribution equipment and adequately support independent of the connecting raceways. Provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the support of the equipment. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Where distribution equipment is installed during construction, Mace temporary covers over the openings at all times, except when work is Wing performed therein. 3.03 INSULATION A. Where distribution equipment is flush mounted in an outside wall. insulate the back and am of cabinet With 1/2 inch rigiid fiberglass insulation. 3.04 FUSES A. Provide fuses at all locations shown on the drawings or required for supplemental protection. B. Deriver to the Owner at the time of final inspection, one spare set of 3 fuses for each type, size and voltage installed. C. Provide instruction label for all fuses installed, indicating fuse type, size and description. 3.05 PHASE BALANCE A. Balance all phase loads to Within 10 percent END OF SEEM 10300 PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, "General Provisiion&" The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, 'General Ptovisions,' form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The luminaim catalog numbers listed on the drawling indicate manufacturer, lumimaire design, appearance, etc., desired. These lueindires shall be modified, if necessary, to comMy with the subsequent specification. C. Provide, complete in all respects, all luminaires shown on the drawiings. Where 8 foot lurnimaires are shown on the drawings and a 4 foot lurninaire scheduled, furnish tandem 4 foot luminaires or two 4 foot individual units. Luminaires specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of luminaires of other manufacturers. The sole and final judgment of substitutions lies With the Architect. D. All luminaires must bear the Underwriters Laboratories label. E All luminaire component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages. The shipment from the luminaire manufacturer shall include integrally mounted and/or remote mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the luminaire lamps. F. If luminaires specified herein are discontinued after the contract for the work is executed, provide suitable substitute luminaires, Without additional cost as directed by the ArchitecL G. Accept all responsibility for coordination of substituted luminaires with the balance of the building construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contract fumish the architect five shop drawling portforms (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and candlepower distribution curves of all luminaires to be used on this project. In these portfolios use standard manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by number indicated on lumindire schedule, and other supplemental data indicated below. 1. Picittim, dimensional drawings, and complete specification data. 2. Coefficients of utilirzation by an approved testing laboratory. 3. Candlepower distribution by an approved testing laboratory. 4. Lumindire brightness by an approved testing laboratory. 5. Fusing and type of ballast provided. 6. Certification of plastic materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires 1. Lumindires shall be constructed of steel, rust protected With a five -stage metal prefinishing process, and finished with baked white enamel of the acrylic base or alkyd base type. The entire luminaire shall be finished in this manner except where non- fermus reflecting surfaces or louvem are specified. 2. Luminaires shall be designed for maximum heat dissipation so that under operating conditions of a 90 degrees F. ambient raw temperature, the ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 3. Reflector glass shall be 30 percent minimum measured in accordance with ASTM Method D -523-53T (60 degrees). 4. Provide a reflectance of 85 percent rnmimum on all surfaces measured with an integrating sphere -type reffectometer. 5. Where the luminaires specified require the use of plastic lenses, materials of the highest quarAy conforming to the following requirements: a. Use 100 percent virgin acryllic thermoplastic. b. All raw material used must be of a quality to exceed IES -SPI - NEVA specifications by at least 100 percent This will permit a maximum of 3 units of yellowling factor with 2,000 hours of exposure in a fade -o -meter. The lumindire manufacturer shall fumish a guarantee that 3 units of yellowing will not be exceeded after 15 years of luminuire use, on a 10 -hour day, 7 -day week basis. B. Ballasts 1. Ballasts shall be Motorola Electronic ballasts, or approved equal. Ballasts shall be rapid start and operate at a frequency of 25 KHz, or higher. Ballasts shall have a minimum power factor of .99 and shall not exceed 10% THD. Balkists shall bear the UL label, Class P. 2. Ballasts shall be securely mounted Within luminaires to eliminate vitirution noise and to provide adequate heat transfer. 3. Ballosts operaUng 4,30 mliliamp lamps shall have a sound rating of W. C. Emergency Ballasts I. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a Wininum of 1100 lumens and capable of supporting two kimps. 2. Emergency batteries for emergency lurnimaires utilizing compact D. Lamps fluorescent lamps shall be rated at a rifinimum of 950 lumens. 1. Provide energy saving 78 'Octron* lamps as manufactured by Sylvaniia and as scheduled on the drawings. TWirly-two wait mod start 4100 degree lamps shall have an initial rating of 2900 lumens. 2. Fumish all fluorescent lamps mode by the some lamp manufacturer in order to match color phosphors. 3. Provide low mercury content type fluorescent lamps. 4. *Bum -in' all fluorescent lamps controlled by dimmers for a Winimurn of 100 hours prior to placing in dimmed luminaire. 2.02 INCANDESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Lumindires- Provide incandescent luminaires that hove been designed for a maximum temperature of 90 degrees C at the point of contact With the ceiling. B. Lamps: Provide 120 volt lamps, unless noted otherviiise, conforming to Federal Specification WL -101. Provide frosted or clear bulb, shape (A19, A23, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories including drywall frames. sterns, canoiMes, cords, toggle bofts, etc., necessary to mount the luminaire in a proper and approved method. B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware, trim rings, etc. for the type of ceiling specified. Coordinate Wdi the architectural room finiish schedule. C. Provide all necessary track hardware. fittings, connectors, pendant feeds, end caps, etc. for complete track righting systems. D. Provide all necessary low voltage transformers, connectors, mounting clamps, etc. for complete low voltage righting systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Where luminaires am indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on 1 -1/2 -inch ceiling spacer% unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiring material. 3.02 STANDARD DRYWALL FRAMES A. Provide aluminum drywall frames for all recessed luminaires installed in inaccessible ceilings unless otherwise approved by the Architect. Provide drywall frame designed and fabricated of such material to preclude the possibility of rust staining drywall. 3.03 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Property support and align luminaires and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the luminaires. Coordinate complete luminaire installation With the building construction. Clean and lamp all lurnimaires With new lamps immediately prior to final inspedion. B. Provide all required nisrric bracing for luminaires utirized on projects located in seismiii; zones. C. Square and rectangular luminaires shall be mounted With sides parallel to building lines. and parallel with ceiling lines. D. Install fluorescent lurniinaires as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal arignment, preventing horizontal or verUcal deflection or angular jointing of luminaires suspended in continuous rows. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaire Wes and accessories prior to ordering luminaires. Coordinate and cooperate With ceiling supplier in the preparation of ceMing shop drawings. B. Verify thickness of ceiling systems and provide extensimns as required for all downlights. C. Verify luminaim dimensions and coordinate with the available wall and/or ceiring space prior to ordering. END OF SM= 16= PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in SecUon 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16000, *General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Within thirty days after award of contruct fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) containing names of manufacturer, cut sheets and dimensional data for all control equipment to be used on this project. In these portfolios use manufacturer's specification sheets, identified by equipment name. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCKS A. Digital Tirneclocks 1. As indicated on the draviiings. Provide digital 7 -day timeclock with LCD display. 99 set points per week, manual override, autornatic daylight savings adjustment automatic leap year compensation, permanent schedule retention, and power outage backup. Provide Tork DW series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songarno and Intermatic are equally acceptable. B. Electromechancial Timedocks 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide electromechanical 7 -day timeclock, capable of a different program each day of the week. Provide contacts rated 40 amps per pole, voltage indicated on the drawings, and reserve power supply. Provide Tork W series. Equivalent timeclocks manufactured by Songamo and Intermatic are equally acceptable. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Electrically Held 1. As indicated on the drawings. Provide Square 'D' Ckiss 8903, Type L fighting contoctor. Equivalent contactors manufactured by GE Industrial Systems, Siemens, and Eabn/Cutler-Hammer am equally acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance With manufacturees instructions. B. Install individual controls, contoctors, relays and time -delay relays in enclosures dimctly adjacent to the ponelboard serving the circuits controlled. C. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 16300. D. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. E Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays and controls as required to switch the bads in the manner indicated on the drawings whether such independent components are specifically indicated or not. F. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supMy and inform Engineer of arry deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. END OF SEM 1I%V PARTI GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work are specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.' The references herein, to applicable documents outrined in Section 16000, 'General Provisions," form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. The Contractor shall fumish all labor and material necessary for the proper installation and testing of the fire alarm system for this building. The fire alarm system shall be connected to the smoke detectors, audio/visual indicators and the smoke detectors in the return ductwork of the rooftop units. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the current NFPA Standards 72, the local Fire Code, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall bear the Underwriteri' LabomWw label and be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fumish the architect five shop drawing portforios (bound copies) aft receiving approval from the local Fire Marshal. Submit all information required for Man review and permitting by authorities having jurisifliction, inducting but not rimited to equipment cut sheets, floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Equipment: Shall be of the some manufacturer as the exiiiting system and fully compatible with the existing system. B. Fire Alarm Equipment- Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design producL products of the following are acceptable: 1. Gamewell-FCI 2. Fire -Lite Alarms 3. Notifier 4. Silent Knight 5. Siemens Building Technologies. Inc. 6. SimplexGrinnell 8. Substitutions: The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications and all requirements of the project as listed or shown on the drawings. The contractor accepts all responsilmlity for costs and coordination Issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. C. Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances 1. Provide inlitiating devices made the same manufacturer as the control unils. I Provide all notfficatkin appriances made by the some manufacturer. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: 1. Provide all components necessary for jurisdictional approval, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises. Entire building area(s) as indicated on the drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict order of precedence of requirements is as listed. Always comply with the most stringent requimment of each of the following: a. The Americans With DisaWilies Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshall. c. The requirements of the'local authority having jurisdiction. d. Apprmble local codes. e. NFPA 72; where the word *shoukl! is used, consideir that provision mandatory, where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. f. The contruct documents (drawings and specifications) unless those documents exceed the requirements listed in the above standards, in which case the contract documents shall take precederim 4. Evacuation Alarm: Single or Multiple smoke zones; allow for evomation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. Program zones as indicated on the drawings, subject to the approval of the local rim Marshall. 5. Voice Notification: Where indicated with speaker symbology or if required by code, provide emergency voice alarm communications With multichannel capability, (roal. 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone untess otherwise indicated, with alarm notifution in the alarm zone and other adjacent zones as ifictated by the authority having jurisdiction. 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by the local Fire Marshall. 8. Hearing Impaired Occupants. Provide visible notification devices in all public areas and in dwelling units. 9. Combined Systernin Do not combine fire alarm system With other non -fire systems. j B. Superviding Stations and Fire, Department Connections: 1. bdsUng to remain. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class % Slyle A. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources-. 1. Existing to remain. 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance With NFPA 72. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance With NFPA 72. D. WAC 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers as incfioated; shut down air moving fans on all units rated 2,000 ch or greater or as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 CONVENTIONAL CONTROL PANELS A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall -mounted enclosure. 8. Power supply. Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciatom door holders, smoke dampers, and relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supMy With capacity for operating systern in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 rninutes. C. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. D. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. E. Indicating Appliance Circuits. Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. F. Municipal Trip Circuit- Output connections for remote station transmitter. Include muniicipol trip DISCONNECT switch. G. Remote Station Signal Transmitter Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone rines to central station receiver. H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified. 1. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, arid ALARM SILENCE switch. J. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuid trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visual and audliAe trouble alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel. 3. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station. 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is crisplayed until initialing failure or circuit trouble is cleared. K. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Sound arid display local fire alarm signalling devices with signal. 2. Transmit zone -coded signal to remote station equipment 3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel, when present. 4. Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system, when present. 5. Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main floor or afterriate floor, when present 6. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and smoke damper operation, when present 7. Transmit signal to release door hold -open devices by zone, when present L Alarm Reset* System remains in alarm mode until manually reset With key-accesmble reset function; system resets only N initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. M. Lamp Test Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. N. Drift Sequence of Operation: Manual drift function causes alarm mode operation as described. 2.05 INUATING DEVICES A. Ceiling or Wall Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, and auxiliary relay contact suitable for mounting on 4 inch (102 mm) outlet box. Provide two -mire or four -wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits. B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual irxr=Uon of detecW actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide four -Wire detector with separate power supMy and signal circuits. Include remote test/reset station for each duct mounted smoke detector, including audible and visible alarm indication and reset capability. 2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Alarm Lights. NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flusher with red lettered "FIRE! on clear lens. B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 7Z flush type fire alarm horn. 1. Sound Ruling: 8`7 dB at 10 feet (3M). 2. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher. 2.07 FIRE ALARM CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit 1. Install conduit in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 2. Install all concealed, inaccessible wiring in a conduit or raceway. Install all exposed wiring in conduit or raceway. Conduit nil shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross sectional area where three or more cabin am included within a single conduiL Plenum rated cable may be used only where concealed above accessible tile ceilings or accessible shafts. 3. Separate cables from ary open conductors of Class I circuds and do not Mace in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing Ckiss 1 cables. 4. Wiring for low voltage control, alarm notification, emergency communication, and sikfillar power -limited auxiliary functions may be installed in the some conduit as initiating and signaring One circuits. Design system to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the control panel or any other component provided except where entry is specified by the manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum. B. Wire 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall comply with local, state, and national codes and as recommended by the manufacturer. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall be not less than 18 AWG for initiating device and signaling kne circuits, and 14 AWG for noltification appriance circuits. 3. All wiring and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. All field wiring shall be supervised for open eircuids, short circuits, and grounded condition C. Non -Conduit Plenum Rated Vim 1. Where permitted by local codes and authodUes, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, inducting wiring installed IrWide walls. 2. Inilkting Device and Indioating Appliance Circuits: Power rimited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor� 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handring ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. D. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits. Building Wire as specified in Section 16100. E Control Panel: Connected to a separate dedicated branch cimuit with a separate dedicated disconnect switch; circuit labeled FIRE AM. F. FIRE AM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE 1. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors With insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 2. Match existing fire alarm Wire color cocring N present If no coding system exists use the following coding system: 3. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, blue, while, green. 4. Initiating Device Circuit Black, red. 5. Detector Power Supply. Violet brown. 6. Signal Device Circuit Blue (positive), white (negative). 7. Door Hokler/Release: Gray, gray. B. Cirouit Conductors. Copper or optical fiber, provide 200 feet (60 m) extra; color code and label. G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 83 combination waveform arid NFPA 70, except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line -to -neutral, and &90 V(ac), fine -to -line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits, and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to Protect applicable equipment for 24 V(dc) maximum do clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line -to -ground, and 72 V(dc), rine-to-line. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building, rated to protect applicable equipment. H. Locks and Keys: Deriver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the some standard lock and key for each key operated switch and locliable panel and caVinet; provide 5 keys of each type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finislied areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. E. Install products in accordance With manufacturees instructions. F. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Install Wiring in conduit except as provided for accessible concealed areas. G. Where permitted by local codes and authorities, initiating and indicating device circuits may be installed Without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. All Wiring installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit, including Wiring installed inside walls. All Wiring installed where exposed to view shall be in conduit. H. Mount end -of -rine device in box with lost device or separate box adjacent to last device in drait. 1. Mount outlet box for electric door holder/release to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. J. Make conduit and Wiring connections to door holder/release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper swiftches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors as applicable. K. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. NoUfy authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheiluling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person With equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct perform preriminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and suppries required to accomplish inspection and testing. F Perform inspection and testing in accordance With NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work. adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire systern complies with contract documents. H. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days Without ary system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over aft correction of malfunction. I At end of successful crognostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Farm! 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maiintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output miatrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined With inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieM until inspection and testing is successful and: I. Specified diagnosUc period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. . Final acceptance of the fire alarm systern has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy pernifl: has been granted. 7. Specified pre-doseout instruction is complete. C. Perform post -occupancy instruction withiin I month after date of occupancy. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid for later acceptance, for a maintenance contract for 2 years, to include the work described below, include the total cost of contract proposal to be valk! at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having juriscrction. C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner 1. Provide on-site response Within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner Will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time, include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contruct. D. Provide a complete description of preventive momtenance, systematic examimation, adjustment cleaning, inspection, and testing, With a detailed schedule. E Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nattim of the trouble, correction performed, and parts repkiced. Subrnit duplicate of each log entry to Ownees representative upon completion of site visit. F. Comply With Owner's requirements for access to facilly and security. 1*11111`&M PART I GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General technical requirements for this section of the work am specified in Section 16000, 'General Provisions.* The references herein, to applicable documents outlined in Section 16DOO, "General Provisicim" form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. B. Although such work is not specifically incricated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKWARDS A. Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick, UL -labeled fire - retardant, size as indicated on the drawings. Do not point over UL label. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius. 1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep With single gang plaster ring. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. Conduit- As specified in Section 16100. Provide pull cords in all conduit. Use 3/4 inch conduit minimum. B. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC -40 conduit. Use ekDnded- sweep bends as necessary to accommodate the serving utiliVs REVIEWED requirements and to permit the installation of cables inducting any necessary heads and terminations where applicable. COMPLIANCI NFPA 70 -1 PAI?T 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BACKWARDS JAN 2 A. Provide 6 AWG grounding conductor to the power system's grounding electrode systern. iV of Tukl 3.02 PATHWAYS BUILDING DIN A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade. Encase in at least 3 inch thick concrete for ot least 60 inches out from the building rine. B. Install With the folloveing minimum clearances: 1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters. transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power system. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and ponelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit RECEIVED 1. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a siinfilITY OF TUMILP horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially i installed. DEC 2 9 2016 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceifings, and floors except where specifically incricated to be exposed. PERFAIT CENTER a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as I exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel With or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structurol members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder. Seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70. E Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penistrations through fire - rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 160DO. WA ECTS ARCHITECTS 6418 E TANQUE VERDE TUCSON, AZ 85715 P (520) 546-6667 F (520) 546-4777 30 )0 00 W-1-017 . -0 � .00 i ori a rl- i 0 0 00 L 0 r 0 0 00 00 Ir - 00 (3) Z 0 0 Z :D r) rr W rl Z CC C/) Ir - LO CY) DEC.20.201 BY:SM JOB:#16.02